[go: up one dir, main page]

HK1243572B - Image processing device and method - Google Patents

Image processing device and method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
HK1243572B
HK1243572B HK18102904.1A HK18102904A HK1243572B HK 1243572 B HK1243572 B HK 1243572B HK 18102904 A HK18102904 A HK 18102904A HK 1243572 B HK1243572 B HK 1243572B
Authority
HK
Hong Kong
Prior art keywords
unit
coefficient
data
difference
image
Prior art date
Application number
HK18102904.1A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
HK1243572A1 (en
Inventor
田中润一
森上义崇
Original Assignee
索尼公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 索尼公司 filed Critical 索尼公司
Publication of HK1243572A1 publication Critical patent/HK1243572A1/en
Publication of HK1243572B publication Critical patent/HK1243572B/en

Links

Description

图像处理装置和方法Image processing device and method

本申请是申请号为201380010481.8、申请日为2013年2月28日、名称为“图像处理装置和方法”的发明专利申请的分案申请。This application is a divisional application of the invention patent application with application number 201380010481.8, application date February 28, 2013, and name “Image Processing Device and Method”.

技术领域Technical Field

本公开内容涉及一种图像处理装置和方法。The present disclosure relates to an image processing apparatus and method.

背景技术Background Art

在作为视频编码方案的标准规范之一的H.264/AVC(高级视频编码)中,高规格(High Profile)或更高规格中的各规格允许利用针对正交变换系数的每个分量而不同的量化步长尺寸来量化图像数据。可基于参考步长值和由与正交变换的单位相等的尺寸定义的量化矩阵(也被称为缩放列表)设置针对正交变换系数的每个分量的量化步长尺寸。In H.264/AVC (Advanced Video Coding), one of the standard specifications for video coding schemes, each of the High Profile and higher profiles allows image data to be quantized using a quantization step size that differs for each component of an orthogonal transform coefficient. The quantization step size for each component of an orthogonal transform coefficient can be set based on a reference step value and a quantization matrix (also known as a scaling list) defined by a size equal to the unit of the orthogonal transform.

针对每个预测模式(帧内预测模式、帧间预测模式)并且针对每个变换单位尺寸(4×4、8×8)准备量化矩阵的指定值。另外,使得用户能够指定不同于序列参数集或图像参数集中的指定值的独一无二的量化矩阵。在未使用量化矩阵的情况下,用于量化的量化步长尺寸针对所有分量具有相等的值。Specified values for the quantization matrix are prepared for each prediction mode (intra-frame prediction mode, inter-frame prediction mode) and for each transform unit size (4×4, 8×8). In addition, the user is allowed to specify a unique quantization matrix that is different from the values specified in the sequence parameter set or picture parameter set. When no quantization matrix is used, the quantization step size used for quantization has the same value for all components.

在正被标准化为下一代视频编码方案并且作为H.264/AVC的后继方案的HEVC(高效率视频编码)中,已引入了与传统宏块对应的编码单位(CU)的概念(参见例如NPL 1)。编码单位的尺寸的范围由序列参数集中的一组值指定,所述一组值是2的幂,被称为最大编码单位(LCU)和最小编码单位(SCU)。另外,使用split_flag指定由LCU和SCU指定的范围中的具体编码单位尺寸。In HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding), which is being standardized as a next-generation video coding scheme and the successor to H.264/AVC, the concept of coding units (CUs) corresponding to traditional macroblocks has been introduced (see, for example, NPL 1). The range of coding unit sizes is specified by a set of values in the sequence parameter set, which are powers of 2 and are called the largest coding unit (LCU) and the smallest coding unit (SCU). In addition, the split_flag is used to specify the specific coding unit size within the range specified by the LCU and SCU.

在HEVC中,一个编码单位可被划分为一个或多个正交变换单位或一个或多个变换单位(TU)。可用变换单位尺寸是4×4、8×8、16×16和32×32中的任何一个。In HEVC, one coding unit can be divided into one or more orthogonal transform units or one or more transform units (TUs). Available transform unit sizes are any one of 4×4, 8×8, 16×16, and 32×32.

同时,为了诸如在传输期间减少编码量的目的,量化矩阵(缩放列表)的DC分量(也被称为直流分量)被传输作为不同于其AC分量(也被称为交流分量)的数据。具体地讲,缩放列表的DC分量被传输作为不同于AC系数(也被称为交流系数)的DC系数(也被称为直流系数),AC系数是缩放列表的AC分量。At the same time, for the purpose of reducing the amount of code during transmission, the DC component (also referred to as a direct current component) of the quantization matrix (scaling list) is transmitted as data different from its AC component (also referred to as an alternating current component). Specifically, the DC component of the scaling list is transmitted as a DC coefficient (also referred to as a direct current coefficient) different from the AC coefficient (also referred to as an alternating current coefficient), which is the AC component of the scaling list.

为了在传输期间减少DC系数的编码量,已提出从DC系数的值减去常数(例如,8)并且使用有符号指数Golomb编码对作为结果的值(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8)进行编码(参见例如NPL 1)。To reduce the amount of coding of the DC coefficient during transmission, it has been proposed to subtract a constant (eg, 8) from the value of the DC coefficient and encode the resulting value (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8) using signed exponential Golomb coding (see, eg, NPL 1).

引用列表Reference List

非专利文献Non-patent literature

NPL 1:Benjamin Bross,Fraunhofer HHI,Woo-Jin Han,Gachon University,Jens-Rainer Ohm,RWTH Aachen,Gary J.Sullivan,Microsoft,Thomas Wiegand,Fraunhofer HHI/TU Berlin,JCTVC-H1003,"High Efficiency Video Coding(HEVC)textspecification draft 6",Joint Collaborative Team on Video Coding(JCT-VC)ofITU-T SG16WP3and ISO/IEC JTC1/SC29/WG11 7th Meeting:Geneva,CH,2011年11月21-30日NPL 1: Benjamin Bross, Fraunhofer HHI, Woo-Jin Han, Gachon University, Jens-Rainer Ohm, RWTH Aachen, Gary J.Sullivan, Microsoft, Thomas Wiegand, Fraunhofer HHI/TU Berlin, JCTVC-H1003, "High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) text specification draft 6", Joint Collaborative Team on Video Coding(JCT-VC)ofITU-T SG16WP3and ISO/IEC JTC1/SC29/WG11 7th Meeting:Geneva,CH,November 21-30, 2011

发明内容Summary of the Invention

技术问题Technical issues

然而,存在这样的担心:虽然上述方法方便处理,但它将不会提供足够的压缩效率。However, there is a concern that while the above approach facilitates processing, it will not provide sufficient compression efficiency.

考虑到上述情况而提出本公开内容,并且本公开内容的目的在于使得能够抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。The present disclosure has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present disclosure is to enable suppression of an increase in the encoding amount of a scaling list.

问题的解决方案Solution to the problem

本公开内容的一方面提供一种图像处理装置,包括:设置单元,被配置为设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,该量化矩阵的尺寸局限于不大于发送尺寸,该发送尺寸是在发送中允许的最大尺寸,替换系数被用于替换位于上转换的量化矩阵的开始的系数,通过将量化矩阵上转换成与作为执行去量化的处理的单位的块尺寸相同的尺寸来获得所述上转换的量化矩阵;量化单元,被配置为量化图像以产生量化的数据;和发送单元,被配置为发送通过对由量化单元产生的量化的数据进行编码而获得的编码数据、通过对替换系数进行编码而获得的替换系数数据和通过对由设置单元设置的替换差系数进行编码而获得的替换差系数数据。One aspect of the present disclosure provides an image processing device, including: a setting unit, configured to set a replacement difference coefficient, which is the difference between a replacement coefficient and a coefficient located at the beginning of a quantization matrix, the size of the quantization matrix being limited to not more than a sending size, the sending size being the maximum size allowed in sending, the replacement coefficient being used to replace the coefficient located at the beginning of an up-converted quantization matrix, the up-converted quantization matrix being obtained by up-converting the quantization matrix into a size identical to a block size serving as a unit for performing dequantization processing; a quantization unit, configured to quantize an image to generate quantized data; and a sending unit, configured to send encoded data obtained by encoding the quantized data generated by the quantization unit, replacement coefficient data obtained by encoding the replacement coefficient, and replacement difference coefficient data obtained by encoding the replacement difference coefficient set by the setting unit.

设置单元可以设置替换系数与为量化矩阵设置的初始值之差。The setting unit may set a difference between the replacement coefficient and an initial value set for the quantization matrix.

设置单元可以设置作为量化矩阵的系数之差的差系数,以及发送单元可以发送通过对由设置单元设置的差系数进行编码而获得的差系数数据。The setting unit may set a difference coefficient that is a difference between coefficients of the quantization matrix, and the transmitting unit may transmit difference coefficient data obtained by encoding the difference coefficient set by the setting unit.

发送单元可以共同发送替换系数数据和替换差系数数据。The sending unit may send the replacement coefficient data and the replacement difference coefficient data together.

发送单元可以按照替换系数数据、替换差系数数据的顺序发送替换系数数据和替换差系数数据。The sending unit may send the replacement coefficient data and the replacement difference coefficient data in the order of replacement coefficient data and replacement difference coefficient data.

量化单元可以使用量化矩阵或上转换的量化矩阵来量化图像。The quantization unit may quantize the image using a quantization matrix or an up-converted quantization matrix.

作为执行编码处理的处理的单位的编码单位和作为执行变换处理的处理的单位的变换单位可以具有分层结构,以及图像处理装置还可以包括被配置为对由量化单元产生的量化的数据进行编码的编码单元。The coding unit as a unit of processing for performing the coding process and the transform unit as a unit of processing for performing the transform process may have a hierarchical structure, and the image processing device may further include a coding unit configured to encode the quantized data generated by the quantization unit.

本公开内容的一方面还提供一种图像处理方法,包括:设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,该量化矩阵的尺寸局限于不大于发送尺寸,该发送尺寸是在发送中允许的最大尺寸,替换系数被用于替换位于上转换的量化矩阵的开始的系数,通过将量化矩阵上转换成与作为执行去量化的处理的单位的块尺寸相同的尺寸来获得所述上转换的量化矩阵;量化图像以产生量化的数据;以及发送通过对产生的量化的数据进行编码而获得的编码数据、通过对替换系数进行编码而获得的替换系数数据和通过对设置的替换差系数进行编码而获得的替换差系数数据。One aspect of the present disclosure also provides an image processing method, including: setting a replacement difference coefficient, which is the difference between the replacement coefficient and the coefficient located at the beginning of a quantization matrix, the size of the quantization matrix is limited to not more than a sending size, which is the maximum size allowed in the transmission, the replacement coefficient is used to replace the coefficient located at the beginning of the up-converted quantization matrix, and the up-converted quantization matrix is obtained by up-converting the quantization matrix into a size that is the same as the block size as the unit for performing dequantization processing; quantizing the image to generate quantized data; and sending the encoded data obtained by encoding the generated quantized data, the replacement coefficient data obtained by encoding the replacement coefficient, and the replacement difference coefficient data obtained by encoding the set replacement difference coefficient.

在本公开内容的一方面,设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,该量化矩阵的尺寸局限于不大于发送尺寸,该发送尺寸是在发送中允许的最大尺寸,替换系数被用于替换位于上转换的量化矩阵的开始的系数,通过将量化矩阵上转换成与作为执行去量化的处理的单位的块尺寸相同的尺寸来获得所述上转换的量化矩阵;图像被量化以产生量化的数据;以及发送通过对产生的量化的数据进行编码而获得的编码数据、通过对替换系数进行编码而获得的替换系数数据和通过对设置的替换差系数进行编码而获得的替换差系数数据。In one aspect of the present disclosure, a replacement difference coefficient is set, which is the difference between the replacement coefficient and the coefficient located at the beginning of a quantization matrix, the size of the quantization matrix is limited to be no larger than a transmission size, which is the maximum size allowed in transmission, the replacement coefficient is used to replace the coefficient located at the beginning of the up-converted quantization matrix, and the up-converted quantization matrix is obtained by up-converting the quantization matrix into a size that is the same as a block size as a unit for performing dequantization processing; the image is quantized to generate quantized data; and the encoded data obtained by encoding the generated quantized data, the replacement coefficient data obtained by encoding the replacement coefficient, and the replacement difference coefficient data obtained by encoding the set replacement difference coefficient are transmitted.

发明的有益效果Advantageous Effects of the Invention

根据本公开内容,可处理图像。特别地,可抑制量化矩阵的编码量的增加。According to the present disclosure, it is possible to process an image and, in particular, suppress an increase in the amount of coding of a quantization matrix.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[图1]图1是表示缩放列表的例子的示图。[ Fig. 1] Fig. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a zoom list.

[图2]图2是表示上转换的例子的示图。[ Fig. 2] Fig. 2 is a diagram showing an example of up-conversion.

[图3]图3是表示如何在解码器中使用缩放列表的例子的示图。[Fig. 3] Fig. 3 is a diagram showing an example of how a scaling list is used in a decoder.

[图4]图4是表示缩放列表的编码的例子的示图。[Fig. 4] Fig. 4 is a diagram showing an example of encoding of a scaling list.

[图5]图5是表示使用本技术的缩放列表的编码的例子的示图。[Fig. 5] Fig. 5 is a diagram showing an example of encoding of a scaling list using the present technology.

[图6]图6是表示指数Golomb码的例子的示图。[ Fig. 6] Fig. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an exponential Golomb code.

[图7]图7包括表示缩放列表的语法的例子的示图。[ Fig. 7] Fig. 7 includes diagrams showing examples of syntax representing a zoom list.

[图8]图8是表示默认矩阵的语法的例子的示图。[ Fig. 8] Fig. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the syntax of a default matrix.

[图9]图9包括表示默认矩阵的语义的例子的示图。[ Fig. 9] Fig. 9 includes diagrams showing examples of the semantics of a default matrix.

[图10]图10是表示缩放列表的语法的例子的示图。[ Fig. 10] Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图11]图11是表示使用本技术的缩放列表的语法的例子的示图。[ Fig. 11] Fig. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the syntax of a zoom list using the present technology.

[图12]图12包括表示相关技术中的缩放列表的语法的例子的示图。[ Fig. 12] Fig. 12 includes diagrams showing an example of the syntax of a zoom list in the related art.

[图13]图13是表示缩放列表的语法的例子的示图。[Fig. 13] Fig. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图14]图14是表示图像编码装置的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 14] Figure 14 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of an image encoding device.

[图15]图15是表示正交变换/量化单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 15] Figure 15 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of an orthogonal transform/quantization unit.

[图16]图16是表示矩阵处理单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Fig. 16] Fig. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a matrix processing unit.

[图17]图17是表示下采样的例子的示图。[Fig. 17] Fig. 17 is a diagram showing an example of downsampling.

[图18]图18是表示交叠部分的去除的例子的示图。[Fig. 18] Fig. 18 is a diagram showing an example of removal of overlapping portions.

[图19]图19是表示DPCM单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Fig. 19] Fig. 19 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a DPCM unit.

[图20]图20是表示量化矩阵编码处理的流程的例子的流程图。[Figure 20] Figure 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of quantization matrix encoding processing.

[图21]图21是表示DPCM处理的流程的例子的流程图。[Fig. 21] Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of DPCM processing.

[图22]图22是表示图像解码装置的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 22] Figure 22 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of an image decoding device.

[图23]图23是表示去量化/逆正交变换单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 23] Figure 23 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit.

[图24]图24是表示矩阵产生单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 24] Figure 24 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a matrix generating unit.

[图25]图25是表示最近邻居内插处理的例子的示图。[Fig. 25] Fig. 25 is a diagram showing an example of nearest neighbor interpolation processing.

[图26]图26是表示逆DPCM单元的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Fig. 26] Fig. 26 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of an inverse DPCM unit.

[图27]图27是表示矩阵产生处理的流程的例子的流程图。[Figure 27] Figure 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of matrix generation processing.

[图28]图28是表示残差信号解码处理的流程的例子的流程图。[Figure 28] Figure 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of residual signal decoding processing.

[图29]图29是表示逆DPCM处理的流程的例子的流程图。[Figure 29] Figure 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of inverse DPCM processing.

[图30]图30是表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 30] Fig. 30 is a diagram showing another example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图31]图31是表示DPCM单元的另一个示例配置的方框图。[Figure 31] Figure 31 is a block diagram showing another example configuration of the DPCM unit.

[图32]图32是表示DPCM处理的流程的另一个例子的流程图。[Figure 32] Figure 32 is a flowchart showing another example of the process of DPCM processing.

[图33]图33是表示逆DPCM单元的另一个示例配置的方框图。[Figure 33] Figure 33 is a block diagram showing another example configuration of an inverse DPCM unit.

[图34]图34是表示逆DPCM处理的流程的另一个例子的流程图。[Figure 34] Figure 34 is a flowchart showing another example of the process of inverse DPCM processing.

[图35]图35是表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 35] Fig. 35 is a diagram showing another example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图36]图36是表示逆DPCM处理的流程的另一个例子的流程图。[Figure 36] Figure 36 is a flowchart showing another example of the process of inverse DPCM processing.

[图37]图37是表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 37] Fig. 37 is a diagram showing another example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图38]图38是表示DPCM单元的另一个示例配置的方框图。[Figure 38] Figure 38 is a block diagram showing another example configuration of the DPCM unit.

[图39]图39是表示DPCM处理的另一个例子的流程图。[Fig. 39] Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing another example of DPCM processing.

[图40]图40是表示逆DPCM单元的另一个示例配置的方框图。[Figure 40] Figure 40 is a block diagram showing another example configuration of an inverse DPCM unit.

[图41]图41是表示逆DPCM处理的流程的另一个例子的流程图。[Figure 41] Figure 41 is a flowchart showing another example of the process of inverse DPCM processing.

[图42]图42是表示逆DPCM处理的流程的另一个例子的从图41继续的流程图。[Figure 42] Figure 42 is a flowchart continuing from Figure 41, showing another example of the process of inverse DPCM processing.

[图43]图43包括表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 43] Fig. 43 includes diagrams showing another example of syntax representing a zoom list.

[图44]图44包括表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 44] Fig. 44 includes diagrams showing another example of the syntax of a zoom list.

[图45]图45包括表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子的示图。[Fig. 45] Fig. 45 includes diagrams showing another example of syntax representing a zoom list.

[图46]图46是表示多视点图像编码方案的例子的示图。[Figure 46] Figure 46 is a diagram showing an example of a multi-view image encoding scheme.

[图47]图47是表示应用本技术的多视点图像编码装置的主要配置的例子的示图。[Figure 47] Figure 47 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a multi-view image encoding device to which the present technology is applied.

[图48]图48是表示应用本技术的多视点图像解码装置的主要配置的例子的示图。[Figure 48] Figure 48 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a multi-view image decoding device to which the present technology is applied.

[图49]图49是表示分层图像编码方案的例子的示图。[Figure 49] Figure 49 is a diagram showing an example of a layered image coding scheme.

[图50]图50是表示应用本技术的分层图像编码装置的主要配置的例子的示图。[Figure 50] Figure 50 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a layered image encoding device to which the present technology is applied.

[图51]图51是表示应用本技术的分层图像解码装置的主要配置的例子的示图。[Figure 51] Figure 51 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a layered image decoding device to which the present technology is applied.

[图52]图52是表示计算机的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 52] Figure 52 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a computer.

[图53]图53是表示电视设备的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 53] Figure 53 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a television device.

[图54]图54是表示移动终端装置的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 54] Figure 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a mobile terminal device.

[图55]图55是表示记录/再现设备的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 55] Figure 55 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of a recording/reproducing device.

[图56]图56是表示成像设备的主要配置的例子的方框图。[Figure 56] Figure 56 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of an imaging device.

[图57]图57是表示可伸缩编码的使用的例子的方框图。[Figure 57] Figure 57 is a block diagram showing an example of the use of scalable coding.

[图58]图58是表示可伸缩编码的使用的另一个例子的方框图。[Figure 58] Figure 58 is a block diagram showing another example of the use of scalable coding.

[图59]图59是表示可伸缩编码的使用的另一个例子的方框图。[Figure 59] Figure 59 is a block diagram showing another example of the use of scalable coding.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

将在以下描述用于执行本公开内容的模式(以下,被称为实施例)。在这个方面,将按照下面的次序进行描述。Modes for carrying out the present disclosure (hereinafter, referred to as embodiments) will be described below. In this regard, the description will be made in the following order.

1.第一实施例(本技术的示例性应用)1. First embodiment (exemplary application of the present technology)

2.第二实施例(图像编码装置、图像解码装置:第一方法)2. Second Embodiment (Image Encoding Device, Image Decoding Device: First Method)

3.第三实施例(图像编码装置、图像解码装置:第二方法)3. Third Embodiment (Image Encoding Device, Image Decoding Device: Second Method)

4.第四实施例(图像编码装置、图像解码装置:第三方法)4. Fourth Embodiment (Image Encoding Device, Image Decoding Device: Third Method)

5.第五实施例(图像编码装置、图像解码装置:第四方法)5. Fifth Embodiment (Image Encoding Device, Image Decoding Device: Fourth Method)

6.第六实施例(图像编码装置、图像解码装置:其它方法)6. Sixth Embodiment (Image Encoding Device, Image Decoding Device: Other Methods)

7.第七实施例(多视点图像编码装置、多视点图像解码装置)7. Seventh Embodiment (Multi-view Image Encoding Device, Multi-view Image Decoding Device)

8.第八实施例(分层图像编码装置、分层图像解码装置)8. Eighth Embodiment (Layered Image Coding Apparatus, Layered Image Decoding Apparatus)

9.第九实施例(计算机)9. Ninth embodiment (Computer)

10.示例应用10. Sample Application

11.可伸缩编码的示例应用11. Example Application of Scalable Coding

<1.第一实施例><1. First embodiment>

在这个实施例中,将给出将在本技术的第二实施例和后面的实施例中详细描述的本技术的示例性应用的描述。In this embodiment, a description will be given of exemplary applications of the present technology, which will be described in detail in the second embodiment and later embodiments of the present technology.

<1-1.本技术的示例性应用><1-1. Exemplary Applications of the Present Technology>

首先,将描述可应用本技术的示例性例子。本技术是与在当图像数据被编码和解码时执行的量化和去量化处理中使用的缩放列表的编码和解码相关的技术。First, an exemplary example to which the present technology is applicable will be described. The present technology is a technology related to encoding and decoding of a scaling list used in quantization and dequantization processing performed when image data is encoded and decoded.

图像数据的编码和解码可包括系数数据的量化和去量化。以具有预定尺寸的块为单位执行这种量化和去量化,并且使用具有与块尺寸对应的尺寸的缩放列表(或量化矩阵)。例如,在HEVC(高效率视频编码)中,以诸如4×4、8×8、16×16和32×32的尺寸执行量化(或去量化)。在HEVC中,可准备具有4×4和8×8尺寸的量化矩阵。The encoding and decoding of image data may include quantization and dequantization of coefficient data. This quantization and dequantization is performed in units of blocks of a predetermined size, and a scaling list (or quantization matrix) having a size corresponding to the block size is used. For example, in HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding), quantization (or dequantization) is performed in sizes such as 4×4, 8×8, 16×16, and 32×32. In HEVC, quantization matrices having sizes of 4×4 and 8×8 can be prepared.

图1表示8×8缩放列表的例子。如图1中所示,缩放列表包括DC系数和AC系数。包括一个值的DC系数是量化矩阵的(0,0)系数,并且对应于离散余弦转换(DCT)的DC系数。AC系数是除(0,0)系数之外的量化矩阵的系数,并且对应于除DC系数之外的DCT的系数。注意,如图1中所示,AC系数由矩阵表示。也就是说,AC系数也包括(0,0)系数(以下也被称为AC系数(0,0)),并且当被用于量化/去量化时,位于量化矩阵的开始的(0,0)系数被DC系数替换。因此,DC系数也被称为替换系数。在图1中示出的例子中,AC系数形成8×8矩阵。FIG1 shows an example of an 8×8 scaling list. As shown in FIG1 , the scaling list includes a DC coefficient and an AC coefficient. The DC coefficient including one value is the (0,0) coefficient of the quantization matrix and corresponds to the DC coefficient of the discrete cosine transform (DCT). The AC coefficient is the coefficient of the quantization matrix other than the (0,0) coefficient and corresponds to the coefficient of the DCT other than the DC coefficient. Note that, as shown in FIG1 , the AC coefficient is represented by a matrix. That is, the AC coefficient also includes the (0,0) coefficient (hereinafter also referred to as the AC coefficient (0,0)), and when used for quantization/dequantization, the (0,0) coefficient located at the beginning of the quantization matrix is replaced by the DC coefficient. Therefore, the DC coefficient is also called a replacement coefficient. In the example shown in FIG1 , the AC coefficients form an 8×8 matrix.

此外,在HEVC中,8×8量化矩阵的上转换的版本(向上转换)被用于16×16或32×32量化(或去量化)。Furthermore, in HEVC, an up-converted version (up-conversion) of the 8×8 quantization matrix is used for 16×16 or 32×32 quantization (or dequantization).

图2表示8×8缩放列表到16×16缩放列表的上转换的例子。如图2中所示,使用例如最近邻居内插处理对缩放列表进行上转换。将在以下参照例如图25描述最近邻居内插处理的细节。如图2中所示,对缩放列表的AC系数执行上转换。然后,上转换的AC系数之中的(0,0)系数被DC系数替换。FIG2 illustrates an example of upconversion of an 8×8 scaling list to a 16×16 scaling list. As shown in FIG2 , the scaling list is upconverted using, for example, a nearest neighbor interpolation process. Details of the nearest neighbor interpolation process will be described below with reference to, for example, FIG25 . As shown in FIG2 , upconversion is performed on the AC coefficients of the scaling list. The (0,0) coefficient among the upconverted AC coefficients is then replaced by the DC coefficient.

准备两个类型的8×8缩放列表,即用于上转换为16×16的8×8缩放列表(“用于16×16的8×8”)和用于上转换为32×32的8×8缩放列表(“用于32×32的8×8”)。Two types of 8×8 scaling lists are prepared, namely, an 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to 16×16 ("8×8 for 16×16") and an 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to 32×32 ("8×8 for 32×32").

在编码(使用编码器)期间被用于量化的缩放列表也在解码(使用解码器)期间被用于去量化。也就是说,将缩放列表从编码侧(编码器)发送给解码侧(解码器)。图3表示缩放列表的发送的例子。The scaling list used for quantization during encoding (using the encoder) is also used for dequantization during decoding (using the decoder). In other words, the scaling list is sent from the encoding side (encoder) to the decoding side (decoder). Figure 3 shows an example of how the scaling list is sent.

在图3中示出的例子中,发送如上所述的两个类型的8×8缩放列表,即用于上转换为16×16尺寸的8×8缩放列表和用于上转换为32×32尺寸的8×8缩放列表。虽然在附图中未示出,但还发送4×4缩放列表。3, two types of 8x8 scaling lists are sent, namely, an 8x8 scaling list for up-conversion to 16x16 size and an 8x8 scaling list for up-conversion to 32x32 size. Although not shown in the figure, a 4x4 scaling list is also sent.

已经以上述方式发送的用于上转换为16×16尺寸的8×8缩放列表的AC系数在解码侧(解码器)使用上述最近邻居内插处理被上转换为16×16尺寸,并且在(0,0)系数被DC系数替换之后被用于具有16×16尺寸的块的去量化。The AC coefficients of the 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to 16×16 size, which have been sent in the above manner, are up-converted to 16×16 size using the above-mentioned nearest neighbor interpolation process on the decoding side (decoder), and are used for dequantization of blocks with 16×16 size after the (0,0) coefficient is replaced by the DC coefficient.

类似地,已经以上述方式发送的用于上转换为32×32尺寸的8×8缩放列表的AC系数也在解码侧(解码器)使用上述最近邻居内插处理被上转换为32×32尺寸,并且在(0,0)系数被DC系数替换之后被用于具有32×32尺寸的块的去量化。Similarly, the AC coefficients of the 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to 32×32 size, which have been sent in the above manner, are also up-converted to 32×32 size using the above-mentioned nearest neighbor interpolation process on the decoding side (decoder), and are used for dequantization of blocks with 32×32 size after the (0,0) coefficient is replaced by the DC coefficient.

<1-2.缩放列表的编码><1-2. Scaling List Encoding>

以上述方式执行的缩放列表的发送将会相应地增加编码量。因此,为了抑制编码效率的降低,使用一定的方法对缩放列表进行编码以减少缩放列表的编码量。图4表示缩放列表的编码的例子。具体地,如下发送8×8缩放列表。Transmitting a scaling list in this manner will increase the amount of code required. Therefore, to minimize the reduction in coding efficiency, a method is used to encode the scaling list to reduce the amount of code required. Figure 4 shows an example of scaling list encoding. Specifically, an 8×8 scaling list is transmitted as follows.

在8×8矩阵至16×16矩阵的上转换的情况下:In the case of up-conversion from an 8×8 matrix to a 16×16 matrix:

(1)获取8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,AC系数(0,0))与预定初始值“8”之差。(1) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 8×8 matrix (that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(2)获取8×8矩阵的系数(也就是说,AC系数)(以扫描顺序按照一维方式排列的系数的序列中的相邻系数)之差。(2) Differences between coefficients of an 8×8 matrix (that is, AC coefficients) (adjacent coefficients in a sequence of coefficients arranged in a one-dimensional manner in scanning order) are obtained.

(3)获取16×16矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)与预定初始值“8”之差。(3) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 16×16 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(4)在(1)和(2)中获得的差以及在(3)中获得的差被分开地发送。(4) The differences obtained in (1) and (2) and the difference obtained in (3) are sent separately.

在8×8矩阵至32×32矩阵的上转换的情况下:In the case of up-conversion from an 8×8 matrix to a 32×32 matrix:

(1)获取8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,AC系数(0,0))与预定初始值“8”之差。(1) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 8×8 matrix (that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(2)获取8×8矩阵的系数(也就是说,AC系数)(以扫描顺序按照一维方式排列的系数的序列中的相邻系数)之差。(2) Differences between coefficients of an 8×8 matrix (that is, AC coefficients) (adjacent coefficients in a sequence of coefficients arranged in a one-dimensional manner in scanning order) are obtained.

(3)获取32×32矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)与预定初始值“8”之差。(3) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 32×32 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(4)在(1)和(2)中获得的差以及在(3)中获得的差被分开地发送。(4) The differences obtained in (1) and (2) and the difference obtained in (3) are sent separately.

然而,在上述方法中,使用有符号指数Golomb编码对这些差进行编码并且在(4)中发送这些差。如上所述,在(1)中获得的差是AC系数(0,0)与初始值“8”之差。因此,存在这样的担心:如果AC系数(0,0)的值不是接近于初始值“8”的值,则编码量可能增加。However, in the above method, these differences are encoded using signed exponential Golomb coding and transmitted in (4). As described above, the difference obtained in (1) is the difference between the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the initial value "8". Therefore, there is a concern that if the value of the AC coefficient (0, 0) is not close to the initial value "8", the amount of code may increase.

例如,在图4中,AC系数(0,0)的值是“12”,以及使用有符号指数Golomb编码对值“4”进行编码并且发送值“4”作为在(1)中获得的差。也就是说,为了发送在(1)中获得的差而需要7比特,并且编码效率可能相应地降低。如果在(1)中获得的差的值增加,则编码效率可能进一步降低。对于用于上转换为16×16尺寸的8×8缩放列表和用于上转换为32×32尺寸的8×8缩放列表的情况而言,同样如此。For example, in FIG4 , the value of the AC coefficient (0,0) is "12," and the value "4" is encoded using signed exponential Golomb coding and transmitted as the difference obtained in (1). That is, 7 bits are required to transmit the difference obtained in (1), and the encoding efficiency may decrease accordingly. If the value of the difference obtained in (1) increases, the encoding efficiency may further decrease. The same is true for the case of an 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to a 16×16 size and an 8×8 scaling list for up-conversion to a 32×32 size.

同时,DCT系数的能量通常集中在DC系数和邻近的低阶系数中。因此,通常,量化矩阵还具有用于DC系数和邻近系数的小的值。另外,如果显著不同的值被用于各频率,则可能在主观上察觉到量化误差。为了抑制图像质量的这种视觉劣化,连续的值被用于DC系数和邻近系数。At the same time, the energy of DCT coefficients is generally concentrated in the DC coefficient and adjacent low-order coefficients. Therefore, the quantization matrix usually also has small values for the DC coefficient and adjacent coefficients. In addition, if significantly different values are used for each frequency, quantization errors may be subjectively perceived. In order to suppress this visual degradation of image quality, continuous values are used for the DC coefficient and adjacent coefficients.

在上转换之后获得的(0,1)系数、(1.0)系数和(1.1)系数对应于在上转换之前的AC系数(0,0)。另外,在上转换之后获得的(0,0)系数对应于DC系数。The (0,1) coefficient, (1.0) coefficient, and (1.1) coefficient obtained after up-conversion correspond to the AC coefficient (0,0) before up-conversion. In addition, the (0,0) coefficient obtained after up-conversion corresponds to the DC coefficient.

因此,在缩放列表中,AC系数(0,0)的值和DC系数的值通常彼此接近。例如,MPEG2、AVC和HEVC默认矩阵采用具有这种关系的值。此外,在图4中示出的例子中,DC系数的值与AC系数(0,0)的值相同,也就是说,“12”。因此,在(3)中获得的差(也就是说,DC系数与初始值“8”之差)的值也是“4”。Therefore, in the scaling list, the value of the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the value of the DC coefficient are usually close to each other. For example, the MPEG2, AVC, and HEVC default matrices adopt values with this relationship. In the example shown in FIG4, the value of the DC coefficient is the same as the value of the AC coefficient (0, 0), that is, "12". Therefore, the difference obtained in (3) (that is, the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial value "8") is also "4".

也就是说,获取其值彼此接近的DC系数和AC系数(0,0)中的每一个与初始值之差可能增加它们之间的差值,并且还可能引起冗余。可以说,将会存在进一步降低编码效率的风险。That is, obtaining the difference between each of the DC coefficient and AC coefficient (0, 0) whose values are close to each other and the initial value may increase the difference between them and may also cause redundancy. It can be said that there is a risk of further reducing encoding efficiency.

为了解决这个问题,替代使用图4中示出的方法,使用下面的方法发送缩放列表。图5表示该方法的例子。To solve this problem, instead of using the method shown in Figure 4, the following method is used to send the zoom list. Figure 5 shows an example of this method.

在8×8矩阵至16×16矩阵的上转换的情况下:In the case of up-conversion from an 8×8 matrix to a 16×16 matrix:

(1)获取8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,AC系数(0,0))与16×16矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)之差。(1) Obtain the difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 8×8 matrix (that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) and the (0,0) coefficient of the 16×16 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient).

(2)获取8×8矩阵的系数(也就是说,AC系数)(以扫描顺序按照一维方式排列的系数的序列中的相邻系数)之差。(2) Differences between coefficients of an 8×8 matrix (that is, AC coefficients) (adjacent coefficients in a sequence of coefficients arranged in a one-dimensional manner in scanning order) are obtained.

(3)获取16×16矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)与预定初始值“8”之差。(3) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 16×16 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(4)在(1)至(3)中获得的差被共同发送。(4) The differences obtained in (1) to (3) are transmitted in common.

在8×8矩阵至32×32矩阵的上转换的情况下:In the case of up-conversion from an 8×8 matrix to a 32×32 matrix:

(1)获取8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,AC系数(0,0))与32×32矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)之差。(1) Obtain the difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 8×8 matrix (that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) and the (0,0) coefficient of the 32×32 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient).

(2)获取8×8矩阵的系数(也就是说,AC系数)(以扫描顺序按照一维方式排列的系数的序列中的相邻系数)之差。(2) Differences between coefficients of an 8×8 matrix (that is, AC coefficients) (adjacent coefficients in a sequence of coefficients arranged in a one-dimensional manner in scanning order) are obtained.

(3)获取32×32矩阵的(0,0)系数(也就是说,DC系数)与预定初始值“8”之差。(3) The difference between the (0,0) coefficient of the 32×32 matrix (that is, the DC coefficient) and a predetermined initial value “8” is obtained.

(4)在(1)至(3)中获得的差被共同发送。(4) The differences obtained in (1) to (3) are transmitted in common.

类似于图4中示出的方法,在(4)中,使用指数Golomb编码对这些差进行编码并且发送这些差作为指数Golomb码。Similar to the method shown in FIG. 4 , in (4) the differences are encoded using exponential Golomb coding and transmitted as exponential Golomb codes.

在将这些差作为指数Golomb码发送到的目的地,当接收到指数Golomb码时,接收到的指数Golomb码被解码以获得各个差,并且对获得的差执行与上述(1)至(3)中的处理相反的处理以确定各个系数(DC系数和AC系数)。At the destination to which these differences are sent as exponential Golomb codes, when the exponential Golomb codes are received, the received exponential Golomb codes are decoded to obtain the respective differences, and the reverse processing to that in (1) to (3) above is performed on the obtained differences to determine the respective coefficients (DC coefficient and AC coefficient).

<1-3.本技术的示例性特征><1-3. Exemplary Features of the Present Technology>

现在将描述与上述发送方法相关的本技术的示例性特征。Exemplary features of the present technology related to the above-described transmission method will now be described.

<1-3-1.AC系数(0,0)与DC系数之间的DPCM><1-3-1. DPCM between AC coefficient (0,0) and DC coefficient>

使用差分脉冲编码调制(DPCM)对缩放列表进行编码并且发送缩放列表。在图4中示出的例子中,分别对AC系数和DC系数进行DPCM编码,而根据本技术的特征之一,在图5中示出的例子中,确定并且发送AC系数(0,0)与DC系数之差(也被称为替换差系数)。The scaling list is encoded using differential pulse code modulation (DPCM) and transmitted. In the example shown in FIG4 , the AC coefficient and the DC coefficient are DPCM-encoded separately, while in the example shown in FIG5 , according to one of the features of the present technology, the difference between the AC coefficient (0,0) and the DC coefficient (also referred to as the replacement difference coefficient) is determined and transmitted.

如上所述,AC系数(0,0)和DC系数通常采用彼此接近的值。因此,AC系数(0,0)与DC系数之差可能小于AC系数(0,0)与初始值“8”之差。也就是说,使用本技术的作为AC系数(0,0)与DC系数之差的替换差系数的发送可能更有可能减少编码量。As described above, the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the DC coefficient generally take values close to each other. Therefore, the difference between the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the DC coefficient is likely to be smaller than the difference between the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the initial value "8". In other words, using this technique, transmitting the replacement difference coefficient as the difference between the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the DC coefficient is more likely to reduce the amount of code.

例如,在图5中示出的例子中,在(1)中获得的差的值是“0”。For example, in the example shown in FIG. 5 , the value of the difference obtained in ( 1 ) is “0”.

图6是表示有符号指数Golomb编码的例子的表。如图6中示出的表中所指示的,用于值“4”的指数Golomb码具有7比特的码长,而用于值“0”的指数Golomb码具有1比特的码长。也就是说,与图4中示出的方法相比较,图5中示出的方法可以减少6比特的编码量。FIG6 is a table showing an example of signed exponential Golomb coding. As indicated in the table shown in FIG6, the exponential Golomb code for the value "4" has a code length of 7 bits, while the exponential Golomb code for the value "0" has a code length of 1 bit. That is, compared with the method shown in FIG4, the method shown in FIG5 can reduce the amount of coding by 6 bits.

通常,具有8×8尺寸的量化矩阵的发送需要大约100比特至200比特的编码量。因此,6比特占据总量的大约6%。在高级语法中将编码量减少6%可以说是非常大的效果。Typically, transmitting an 8×8 quantization matrix requires approximately 100 to 200 bits of code. Therefore, 6 bits account for approximately 6% of the total. Reducing the code size by 6% in advanced syntax can be a significant effect.

<1-3-2.DC系数和AC系数的共同发送><1-3-2. Joint Transmission of DC Coefficient and AC Coefficient>

图7表示缩放列表的语法的例子。在图7的部分A中示出的例子中表示图4中示出的例子的语法。具体地,在发送AC系数(0,0)与初始值“8”之差以及AC系数之差(scaling_list_delta_coef)之后,分开地发送DC系数与初始值“8”之差(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8)。FIG7 shows an example of the syntax of the scaling list. The example shown in Part A of FIG7 shows the syntax of the example shown in FIG4. Specifically, after the difference between the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the initial value "8" and the AC coefficient difference (scaling_list_delta_coef) are transmitted, the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial value "8" (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8) is separately transmitted.

相比之下,本技术的特征之一在于:DC系数与AC系数(0,0)之差以及AC系数之差按照该次序排列并且被共同发送。具体地,如图5中所示,在按照预定扫描顺序排列的DC系数和AC系数按照一维方式排列并且DC系数与初始值“8”之差被确定之后,系数的序列中的相邻系数之差被确定。另外,作为结果的差(系数之差)以获得的顺序按照一维方式排列并且被共同发送。In contrast, one of the characteristics of the present technology is that the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient (0, 0), as well as the AC coefficient difference, are arranged in this order and transmitted together. Specifically, as shown in FIG5 , after the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient arranged in a predetermined scanning order are arranged in a one-dimensional manner and the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial value "8" is determined, the difference between adjacent coefficients in the coefficient sequence is determined. Furthermore, the resulting differences (coefficient differences) are arranged in a one-dimensional manner in the obtained order and transmitted together.

在图7的部分B中的例子中表示在这种情况下的语法。具体地,最初,发送DC系数与初始值“8”之差(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8),然后,发送DC系数与AC系数(0,0)之差以及AC系数之差(scaling_list_delta_coef)。也就是说,DC系数和AC系数被共同编码并且发送。The syntax in this case is shown in the example in Part B of Figure 7. Specifically, initially, the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial value "8" (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8) is transmitted, and then the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient (0, 0) and the difference between the AC coefficients (scaling_list_delta_coef) are transmitted. In other words, the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient are encoded and transmitted together.

以这种方式,按照获得的顺序排列的差的共同发送使得差被发送到的解码侧(解码器)能够按照发送的顺序对这些差进行解码并且获得各个系数。也就是说,DPCM编码的缩放列表可以被容易地解码。更具体地,可以减少处理负载。另外,不再需要差的重新排列,从而导致缓冲容量的减少。另外,可以按照提供的顺序来解码各个差,从而导致抑制处理时间的增加。In this way, the common transmission of the differences arranged in the order in which they were obtained enables the decoding side (decoder) to which the differences are transmitted to decode these differences in the order in which they were transmitted and obtain the individual coefficients. In other words, the DPCM-encoded scaling list can be easily decoded. More specifically, the processing load can be reduced. In addition, the rearrangement of the differences is no longer required, resulting in a reduction in buffer capacity. In addition, the individual differences can be decoded in the order in which they were provided, resulting in a suppression of an increase in processing time.

<1-3-3.默认矩阵的发送><1-3-3. Sending the default matrix>

图8是表示用于默认矩阵的发送的语法的例子的示图。在相关技术中,如图8中所示,将初始系数(也就是说,DC系数)发送为“0”以发送指示使用默认矩阵的信息。也就是说,DC系数与初始值“8”之差(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8)的值是“-8”。然而,如图6中所示,用于值“-8”的指数Golomb码具有9比特的码长。也就是说,存在这样的担心:编码效率可能显著降低。通常,希望高级语法的比特数尽可能少。另外,如图8中所示,由于增加的语法的复杂性,处理负载可能增加。FIG8 is a diagram showing an example of a syntax for sending a default matrix. In the related art, as shown in FIG8 , the initial coefficient (that is, the DC coefficient) is sent as "0" to send information indicating that the default matrix is used. In other words, the value of the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial value "8" (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8) is "-8". However, as shown in FIG6 , the exponential Golomb code for the value "-8" has a code length of 9 bits. In other words, there is a concern that the coding efficiency may be significantly reduced. Generally, it is desired that the number of bits of the high-level syntax be as small as possible. In addition, as shown in FIG8 , due to the increased complexity of the syntax, the processing load may increase.

为了解决这些问题,初始系数不被设置为“0”,而是修改scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的语义。更具体地,将scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的语义从图9的部分A中示出的语义修改为图9的部分B中示出的语义。也就是说,在相关技术中,如图9的部分A中所示,等于“0”的值指示参照前一个矩阵(MatrixID-1)。替代该描述,如图9的部分B中所示,scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值等于“0”意味着参照默认矩阵。To address these issues, the initial coefficients are not set to "0," but rather the semantics of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta are modified. More specifically, the semantics of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta are modified from that shown in Part A of FIG. 9 to that shown in Part B of FIG. That is, in the related art, as shown in Part A of FIG. 9 , a value equal to "0" indicates reference to the previous matrix (MatrixID-1). Instead, as shown in Part B of FIG. 9 , a value of "0" in scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta means reference to the default matrix.

因此,用于指示使用默认矩阵的信息的发送的指数Golomb码的码长可以等于1比特,并且可以抑制编码效率的降低。另外,在相关技术中,缩放列表需要如图10的部分A和B中所示的语法。可以如图11中示出的例子中一样简化该语法。也就是说,可以减少缩放列表的编码和解码中所包括的处理负载。Therefore, the code length of the exponential Golomb code used to transmit information indicating the use of the default matrix can be equal to 1 bit, and the reduction in coding efficiency can be suppressed. In addition, in the related art, the scaling list requires the syntax shown in parts A and B of Figure 10. This syntax can be simplified as in the example shown in Figure 11. In other words, the processing load involved in encoding and decoding the scaling list can be reduced.

<1-4.使用本技术的语法的特征><1-4. Features of Syntax Using the Present Technology>

将更具体地描述语法。The syntax will be described more specifically.

在图10的部分A和B中示出的相关技术的例子中,默认的确定需要执行两次,即scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8和scaling_list_delta_coef。另外,对于scaling_list_delta_coef,在“for”循环中进行确定,并且当useDefaultScalingMatrixFlag=1时,离开该循环。另外,需要被称为“stopNow”的中间标记,并且因为该条件,还存在诸如将nextCoef代入到scalingList的值中的分支。以这种方式,相关技术的语法包括复杂的处理。In the example of the related art shown in parts A and B of FIG10, the default determination needs to be performed twice, namely, scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8 and scaling_list_delta_coef. In addition, for scaling_list_delta_coef, the determination is performed in a "for" loop, and when useDefaultScalingMatrixFlag = 1, the loop is exited. In addition, an intermediate flag called "stopNow" is required, and because of this condition, there is also a branch such as substituting nextCoef into the value of scalingList. In this way, the syntax of the related art includes complex processing.

在本技术中,相应地,如图11中示出的例子中一样,从scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8计算的DC系数被代入到nextCoef中,以将scaling_list_delta_coef的初始值设置为DC系数。In the present technology, accordingly, as in the example shown in FIG. 11 , the DC coefficient calculated from scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8 is substituted into nextCoef to set the initial value of scaling_list_delta_coef as the DC coefficient.

另外,在语义中,在相关技术中由“+1”代表的scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值保持不变,并且值“0”被用作特殊值。In addition, in the semantics, the value of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta represented by “+1” in the related art remains unchanged, and a value “0” is used as a special value.

也就是说,在相关技术中,当ScalingList[0][2]将要被解码(matrixId=2)时,如果scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta=0,则从refMatrixId=matrixId-(1+scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta)获得matrixId=2。因此,获得refMatrixId=1,并且复制ScalingList[0][1]的值。That is, in the related art, when ScalingList[0][2] is to be decoded (matrixId=2), if scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta=0, matrixId=2 is obtained from refMatrixId=matrixId-(1+scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta). Therefore, refMatrixId=1 is obtained, and the value of ScalingList[0][1] is copied.

相比之下,在本技术中,设置refMatrixId=matrixId-scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta。当ScalingList[0][2]将要被解码(matrixId=2)时,如果将要复制ScalingList[0][1](或者如果将要获得refMatrixId=1),则可设置scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta=1。In contrast, in the present technology, refMatrixId=matrixId-scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta is set. When ScalingList[0][2] is to be decoded (matrixId=2), if ScalingList[0][1] is to be copied (or if refMatrixId=1 is to be obtained), scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta=1 may be set.

因此,如图11中所示,缩放列表的语法的行数可以显著减少。另外,将要作为中间数据而包括的两个变量,即UseDefaultScalingMatrix和stopNow,可以被省略。另外,可以不再需要如图10中所示的在“for”循环中形成的分支。因此,可以减少缩放列表的编码和解码中所包括的处理负载。Therefore, as shown in FIG11, the number of lines of the syntax of the scaling list can be significantly reduced. In addition, two variables that are to be included as intermediate data, namely UseDefaultScalingMatrix and stopNow, can be omitted. In addition, the branch formed in the "for" loop as shown in FIG10 is no longer necessary. Therefore, the processing load involved in encoding and decoding the scaling list can be reduced.

<1-5.实现本技术的处理单元><1-5. Processing Unit Implementing the Present Technology>

在本技术被应用于缩放列表的发送的情况下,以上述方式对缩放列表进行编码和解码。具体地,以下参照图14描述的图像编码装置10对缩放列表进行编码并且发送编码的缩放列表,以及以下参照图22描述的图像解码装置300接收编码的缩放列表并且对编码的缩放列表进行解码。When the present technology is applied to the transmission of a scaling list, the scaling list is encoded and decoded in the above-described manner. Specifically, the image encoding device 10 described below with reference to FIG14 encodes the scaling list and transmits the encoded scaling list, and the image decoding device 300 described below with reference to FIG22 receives the encoded scaling list and decodes the encoded scaling list.

缩放列表由图像编码装置10的正交变换/量化单元14(图14)中的矩阵处理单元150(图15)进行编码。更具体地,缩放列表由矩阵处理单元150中的熵编码单元164(图16)中的DPCM单元192和exp-G单元193(DPCM单元192和exp-G单元193都被示出在图16中)进行编码。也就是说,DPCM单元192确定缩放列表的系数(DC系数与AC系数)之差,并且exp-G单元193使用指数Golomb编码对各个差进行编码。The scaling list is encoded by the matrix processing unit 150 ( FIG. 15 ) in the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 ( FIG. 14 ) of the image encoding device 10. More specifically, the scaling list is encoded by the DPCM unit 192 and the exp-G unit 193 (both the DPCM unit 192 and the exp-G unit 193 are shown in FIG. 16 ) in the entropy encoding unit 164 ( FIG. 16 ) in the matrix processing unit 150. That is, the DPCM unit 192 determines the difference between the coefficients (DC coefficient and AC coefficient) of the scaling list, and the exp-G unit 193 encodes each difference using exponential Golomb coding.

为了如上所述使用本技术对缩放列表进行编码,DPCM单元192可具有例如图19中所示的示例配置,并且可执行如图21中示出的例子中一样的DPCM处理。另外,可使用如图44的部分C或图45的部分C中示出的例子中一样的语义。In order to encode the scaling list using the present technology as described above, the DPCM unit 192 may have, for example, the example configuration shown in FIG19 and may perform DPCM processing as in the example shown in FIG21. In addition, semantics as in the example shown in part C of FIG44 or part C of FIG45 may be used.

换句话说,可仅需要DPCM单元192和exp-G单元193来使用本技术实现缩放列表的编码,并且可根据需要使用具有任意配置的其它部件。可根据实施例提供需要的配置,诸如用于上转换缩放列表的处理单元和用于使用缩放列表执行量化的处理单元。In other words, only the DPCM unit 192 and the exp-G unit 193 may be required to implement encoding of the scaling list using the present technology, and other components having any configuration may be used as needed. Required configurations such as a processing unit for up-converting the scaling list and a processing unit for performing quantization using the scaling list may be provided according to the embodiment.

另外,缩放列表由图像解码装置300的去量化/逆正交变换单元313(图22)中的矩阵产生单元410(图23)进行解码。更具体地,缩放列表由矩阵产生单元410中的熵解码单元533(图24)中的exp-G单元551和逆DPCM单元552(图24)进行解码。也就是说,exp-G单元551对Golomb码进行解码以获得差,并且逆DPCM单元552从各个差确定缩放列表的各系数(DC系数和AC系数)。The scaling list is decoded by the matrix generation unit 410 ( FIG. 23 ) in the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 ( FIG. 22 ) of the image decoding device 300. More specifically, the scaling list is decoded by the exp-G unit 551 and the inverse DPCM unit 552 ( FIG. 24 ) in the entropy decoding unit 533 ( FIG. 24 ) in the matrix generation unit 410. That is, the exp-G unit 551 decodes the Golomb code to obtain differences, and the inverse DPCM unit 552 determines the coefficients (DC coefficient and AC coefficient) of the scaling list from the differences.

为了如上所述使用本技术对编码的缩放列表进行解码,逆DPCM单元552可具有例如图26中所示的示例配置,并且可执行如图29中示出的例子中一样的逆DPCM处理。另外,可使用如图44的部分C或图45的部分C中示出的例子中一样的语义。In order to decode the encoded scaling list using the present technology as described above, the inverse DPCM unit 552 may have the example configuration shown in FIG26, for example, and may perform inverse DPCM processing as in the example shown in FIG29. In addition, the same semantics as in the examples shown in part C of FIG44 or part C of FIG45 may be used.

换句话说,可仅需要exp-G单元551和逆DPCM单元552来使用本技术实现缩放列表的解码,并且可根据需要使用具有任意配置的其它部件。可根据实施例提供需要的配置,诸如用于上转换缩放列表的处理单元和用于使用缩放列表执行去量化的处理单元。In other words, only the exp-G unit 551 and the inverse DPCM unit 552 may be required to implement decoding of the scaling list using the present technology, and other components having any configuration may be used as needed. Required configurations such as a processing unit for up-converting the scaling list and a processing unit for performing dequantization using the scaling list may be provided according to the embodiment.

将在以下描述应用本技术的各实施例,以用于对本技术的更详细的描述。Various embodiments to which the present technology is applied will be described below for a more detailed description of the present technology.

<2.第二实施例><2. Second embodiment>

<2-1.语法:第一方法><2-1. Syntax: First Method>

(1)相关技术的语法(1) Syntax of related technologies

首先,图12表示相关技术中的量化矩阵(或缩放列表)的语法的例子。在实际使用中,通常发送缩放列表及其预测矩阵之间的差矩阵,而非发送缩放列表。因此,在下面对语法等的描述中,假设对缩放列表的描述也可以应用于差矩阵。First, FIG12 shows an example of the syntax of a quantization matrix (or scaling list) in related art. In actual use, the difference matrix between the scaling list and its prediction matrix is usually transmitted rather than the scaling list. Therefore, in the following description of the syntax, etc., it is assumed that the description of the scaling list can also be applied to the difference matrix.

图12的部分A表示缩放列表数据的语法(缩放列表数据语法),而图12的部分B表示缩放列表的语法(缩放列表语法)。Part A of FIG. 12 shows the syntax of the zoom list data (zoom list data syntax), and part B of FIG. 12 shows the syntax of the zoom list (zoom list syntax).

(1-1)缩放列表数据语法(1-1) Scaling List Data Syntax

如图12的部分A中所示,缩放列表数据的语法规定:读取指示是否提供缩放列表的标记(scaling_list_present_flag)、指示当前模式是否是复制模式的标记(scaling_list_pred_mode_flag)、指示在复制模式下参照哪个缩放列表的信息(scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta)等。As shown in part A of Figure 12, the syntax of the scaling list data stipulates: reading a flag indicating whether a scaling list is provided (scaling_list_present_flag), a flag indicating whether the current mode is a copy mode (scaling_list_pred_mode_flag), information indicating which scaling list is referenced in the copy mode (scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta), etc.

(1-2)缩放列表语法(1-2) Scaling List Syntax

如图12的部分B中所示,缩放列表的语法规定:读取从其减去常数(例如,8)的DC系数(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8)、AC系数之间的差值(scaling_list_delta_coef)等,并且恢复DC系数和AC系数。As shown in part B of FIG. 12 , the syntax of the scaling list stipulates that a DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8) from which a constant (eg, 8) is subtracted, a difference between AC coefficients (scaling_list_delta_coef), etc. are read, and the DC coefficient and AC coefficient are restored.

然而,存在这样的担心:虽然上述各条语法方便处理,但它将不会提供DC系数的足够的压缩效率。However, there is a concern that while the above-described syntax facilitates processing, it will not provide sufficient compression efficiency of the DC coefficient.

因此,为了获得作为DC分量(直流分量)的系数的DC系数(也被称为直流系数)的足够的压缩效率,确定DC系数与另一个系数之差,并且替代DC系数而发送该差值。也就是说,该差值是用于计算DC系数的信息,并且换句话说,基本上等同于DC系数。然而,该差值通常小于DC系数。因此,替代DC系数的该差值的发送可导致编码量的减少。Therefore, in order to achieve sufficient compression efficiency for the DC coefficient (also referred to as the DC coefficient), which is a coefficient of the DC component (direct current component), the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient is determined, and the difference is transmitted instead of the DC coefficient. In other words, the difference is information used to calculate the DC coefficient and, in other words, is essentially equivalent to the DC coefficient. However, the difference is usually smaller than the DC coefficient. Therefore, transmitting the difference instead of the DC coefficient can lead to a reduction in the amount of code.

在下面的描述中,为了描述的方便,缩放列表(量化矩阵)具有8×8尺寸。将在以下描述上述替代DC系数而发送DC系数与另一个系数之差的方法的具体例子。In the following description, for convenience of description, the scaling list (quantization matrix) has a size of 8 × 8. A specific example of the above-mentioned method of transmitting the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient instead of the DC coefficient will be described below.

(2)第一方法的语法(2) Syntax of the first method

例如,可使用DPCM(差分脉冲编码调制)发送65个系数,其中DC系数被视为位于8×8矩阵(AC系数)的开始的元素(第一方法)。For example, 65 coefficients may be transmitted using DPCM (Differential Pulse Code Modulation), where the DC coefficient is considered to be the element at the beginning of an 8x8 matrix (AC coefficients) (first approach).

也就是说,首先,计算预定常数与DC系数之差,并且该差值被用作DPCM数据的初始系数。然后,计算DC系数与初始AC系数之差,并且该差值被用作DPCM数据的第二系数。然后,计算初始AC系数与第二AC系数之差,并且该差值被用作DPCM数据的第三系数。随后,计算与前一个AC系数的差,并且该差值被用作DPCM数据的第四系数,并且以与上述方式类似的方式确定DPCM数据的随后的系数。从初始系数开始顺序地发送以上述方式产生的DPCM数据的系数。That is, first, the difference between a predetermined constant and the DC coefficient is calculated, and this difference is used as the initial coefficient of the DPCM data. Then, the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial AC coefficient is calculated, and this difference is used as the second coefficient of the DPCM data. Then, the difference between the initial AC coefficient and the second AC coefficient is calculated, and this difference is used as the third coefficient of the DPCM data. Subsequently, the difference from the previous AC coefficient is calculated, and this difference is used as the fourth coefficient of the DPCM data. Subsequent coefficients of the DPCM data are determined in a manner similar to that described above. The coefficients of the DPCM data generated in this manner are sequentially transmitted, starting with the initial coefficient.

因此,当8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(AC系数)和DC系数的值彼此接近时,可以提高压缩比。通过实现上述第一方法,图像编码装置可以以与AC系数(交流系数)的方式类似的方式处理DC系数,其中AC系数是AC分量(也被称为交流分量)的系数。注意,为了实现上述第一方法,上述系数被发送到的图像解码装置需要仅特殊处理初始系数。具体地,图像解码装置需要从AC系数之中提取DC系数。Therefore, when the values of the (0,0) coefficient (AC coefficient) and the DC coefficient of the 8×8 matrix are close to each other, the compression ratio can be improved. By implementing the above-mentioned first method, the image encoding device can process the DC coefficient in a manner similar to that of the AC coefficient (alternating current coefficient), where the AC coefficient is the coefficient of the AC component (also called the alternating current component). Note that in order to implement the above-mentioned first method, the image decoding device to which the above-mentioned coefficients are sent needs to specially process only the initial coefficients. Specifically, the image decoding device needs to extract the DC coefficient from the AC coefficients.

图13表示在上述情况下的缩放列表的语法。在图13中示出的例子中,读取系数之间的65个差值(scaling_list_delta_coef),并且在从差值确定的系数(nextcoef)之中,位于开始的系数(nextcoef)被用作DC系数(scaling_list_dc_coef),而其它系数被用作AC系数(ScalingList[i])。Figure 13 shows the syntax of the scaling list in the above case. In the example shown in Figure 13, 65 differences between coefficients (scaling_list_delta_coef) are read, and among the coefficients (nextcoef) determined from the differences, the coefficient at the beginning (nextcoef) is used as the DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef), while the other coefficients are used as AC coefficients (ScalingList[i]).

将在下文中描述实现上述第一方法的语法的图像编码装置。An image encoding device that implements the syntax of the above-mentioned first method will be described below.

<2-2.图像编码装置><2-2. Image Coding Device>

图14是表示根据本公开内容的实施例的图像编码装置10的示例配置的方框图。图14中示出的图像编码装置10是应用本技术的图像处理装置,以及该图像处理装置被配置为对输入图像数据进行编码并且输出编码的图像数据。参照图14,图像编码装置10包括A/D(模数)转换单元11(A/D)、重新排列缓冲器12、减法单元13、正交变换/量化单元14、无损编码单元16、累积缓冲器17、速率控制单元18、去量化单元21、逆正交变换单元22、加法器单元23、去块滤波器24、帧存储器25、选择器26、帧内预测单元30、运动搜索单元40和模式选择单元50。Figure 14 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of an image encoding device 10 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The image encoding device 10 shown in Figure 14 is an image processing device to which the present technology is applied, and the image processing device is configured to encode input image data and output the encoded image data. Referring to Figure 14, the image encoding device 10 includes an A/D (analog-to-digital) conversion unit 11 (A/D), a rearrangement buffer 12, a subtraction unit 13, an orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14, a lossless encoding unit 16, an accumulation buffer 17, a rate control unit 18, a dequantization unit 21, an inverse orthogonal transform unit 22, an adder unit 23, a deblocking filter 24, a frame memory 25, a selector 26, an intra-frame prediction unit 30, a motion search unit 40, and a mode selection unit 50.

A/D转换单元11将以模拟形式输入的图像信号转换成数字形式的图像数据,并且将数字图像数据序列输出到重新排列缓冲器12。The A/D conversion unit 11 converts an image signal input in an analog form into image data in a digital form, and outputs a sequence of digital image data to the rearrangement buffer 12 .

重新排列缓冲器12重新排列从A/D转换单元11输入的图像数据序列中所包括的图像。在根据用于编码处理的GOP(图像组)结构重新排列图像之后,重新排列缓冲器12将图像已被重新排列的图像数据输出到减法单元13、帧内预测单元30和运动搜索单元40。The rearrangement buffer 12 rearranges images included in the image data sequence input from the A/D conversion unit 11. After rearranging the images according to a GOP (Group of Pictures) structure for encoding processing, the rearrangement buffer 12 outputs the image data whose images have been rearranged to the subtraction unit 13, the intra prediction unit 30, and the motion search unit 40.

向减法单元13提供从重新排列缓冲器12输入的图像数据和由模式选择单元50选择的预测图像数据,将在以下对此进行描述。减法单元13计算代表从重新排列缓冲器12输入的图像数据与从模式选择单元50输入的预测图像数据之差的预测误差数据,并且将计算的预测误差数据输出到正交变换/量化单元14。The image data input from the rearrangement buffer 12 and the predicted image data selected by the mode selection unit 50 are supplied to the subtraction unit 13, which will be described below. The subtraction unit 13 calculates prediction error data representing the difference between the image data input from the rearrangement buffer 12 and the predicted image data input from the mode selection unit 50, and outputs the calculated prediction error data to the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14.

正交变换/量化单元14对从减法单元13输入的预测误差数据执行正交变换和量化,并且将量化的变换系数数据(在下文中被称为量化的数据)输出到无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。根据从速率控制单元18提供的速率控制信号控制从正交变换/量化单元14输出的量化的数据的比特率。将在以下进一步描述正交变换/量化单元14的详细配置。The orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 performs orthogonal transform and quantization on the prediction error data input from the subtraction unit 13, and outputs quantized transform coefficient data (hereinafter referred to as quantized data) to the lossless encoding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21. The bit rate of the quantized data output from the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 is controlled according to the rate control signal supplied from the rate control unit 18. The detailed configuration of the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 will be further described below.

向无损编码单元16提供从正交变换/量化单元14输入的量化的数据、用于在解码侧产生缩放列表(或量化矩阵)的信息和关于由模式选择单元50选择的帧内预测或帧间预测的信息。关于帧内预测的信息可包括例如指示每个块的最佳帧内预测模式的预测模式信息。另外,关于帧间预测的信息可包括例如运动向量的逐块预测的预测模式信息、差分运动向量信息、参考图像信息等。此外,用于在解码侧产生缩放列表的信息可包括指示将要被发送的缩放列表的最大尺寸(或缩放列表(量化矩阵)及其预测矩阵之间的差矩阵)的识别信息。The lossless encoding unit 16 is provided with the quantized data input from the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14, information for generating a scaling list (or quantization matrix) on the decoding side, and information on intra prediction or inter prediction selected by the mode selection unit 50. The information on intra prediction may include, for example, prediction mode information indicating the optimal intra prediction mode for each block. In addition, the information on inter prediction may include, for example, prediction mode information for block-by-block prediction of a motion vector, differential motion vector information, reference image information, etc. Furthermore, the information for generating a scaling list on the decoding side may include identification information indicating the maximum size of the scaling list to be transmitted (or the difference matrix between the scaling list (quantization matrix) and its prediction matrix).

无损编码单元16对量化的数据执行无损编码处理以产生编码流。由无损编码单元16执行的无损编码可以是例如可变长度编码、算术编码等。另外,无损编码单元16将用于产生缩放列表的信息多路复用到编码流的头部(例如,序列参数集和图像参数集)中。无损编码单元16还将上述关于帧内预测或帧间预测的信息多路复用到编码流的头部中。其后,无损编码单元16将产生的编码流输出到累积缓冲器17。The lossless coding unit 16 performs lossless coding on the quantized data to generate a coded stream. The lossless coding performed by the lossless coding unit 16 may be, for example, variable length coding, arithmetic coding, or the like. Furthermore, the lossless coding unit 16 multiplexes information used to generate a scaling list into the header of the coded stream (e.g., a sequence parameter set and a picture parameter set). The lossless coding unit 16 also multiplexes the aforementioned information regarding intra-frame prediction or inter-frame prediction into the header of the coded stream. Thereafter, the lossless coding unit 16 outputs the generated coded stream to the accumulation buffer 17.

累积缓冲器17使用存储介质(诸如,半导体存储器)临时地累积从无损编码单元16输入的编码流。其后,累积缓冲器17以与传输路径(或图像编码装置10的输出线路)的带宽对应的速率输出累积的编码流。The accumulation buffer 17 uses a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory to temporarily accumulate the encoded stream input from the lossless encoding unit 16. Thereafter, the accumulation buffer 17 outputs the accumulated encoded stream at a rate corresponding to the bandwidth of the transmission path (or output line of the image encoding device 10).

速率控制单元18监测累积缓冲器17以检查容量的可用性。速率控制单元18根据累积缓冲器17的可用容量产生速率控制信号,并且将产生的速率控制信号输出到正交变换/量化单元14。例如,当累积缓冲器17的可用容量低时,速率控制单元18产生用于减小量化的数据的比特率的速率控制信号。替代地,例如,当累积缓冲器17的可用容量足够高时,速率控制单元18产生用于增加量化的数据的比特率的速率控制信号。The rate control unit 18 monitors the accumulation buffer 17 to check for capacity availability. The rate control unit 18 generates a rate control signal according to the available capacity of the accumulation buffer 17, and outputs the generated rate control signal to the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14. For example, when the available capacity of the accumulation buffer 17 is low, the rate control unit 18 generates a rate control signal for reducing the bit rate of the quantized data. Alternatively, for example, when the available capacity of the accumulation buffer 17 is sufficiently high, the rate control unit 18 generates a rate control signal for increasing the bit rate of the quantized data.

去量化单元21对从正交变换/量化单元14输入的量化的数据执行去量化处理。其后,去量化单元21将通过去量化处理获取的变换系数数据输出到逆正交变换单元22。The dequantization unit 21 performs a dequantization process on the quantized data input from the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14. Thereafter, the dequantization unit 21 outputs the transform coefficient data obtained by the dequantization process to the inverse orthogonal transform unit 22.

逆正交变换单元22对从去量化单元21输入的变换系数数据执行逆正交变换处理以恢复预测误差数据。其后,逆正交变换单元22将恢复的预测误差数据输出到加法器单元23。The inverse orthogonal transform unit 22 performs an inverse orthogonal transform process on the transform coefficient data input from the dequantization unit 21 to restore the prediction error data. Thereafter, the inverse orthogonal transform unit 22 outputs the restored prediction error data to the adder unit 23.

加法器单元23将从逆正交变换单元22输入的恢复的预测误差数据和从模式选择单元50输入的预测图像数据相加在一起以产生解码图像数据。其后,加法器单元23将产生的解码图像数据输出到去块滤波器24和帧存储器25。The adder unit 23 adds together the restored prediction error data input from the inverse orthogonal transform unit 22 and the predicted image data input from the mode selection unit 50 to generate decoded image data. Thereafter, the adder unit 23 outputs the generated decoded image data to the deblocking filter 24 and the frame memory 25.

去块滤波器24执行用于减少由图像的编码引起的块伪像的滤波处理。去块滤波器24对从加法器单元23输入的解码图像数据进行滤波以去除(或至少减少)块伪像,并且将滤波后的解码图像数据输出到帧存储器25。The deblocking filter 24 performs a filtering process for reducing block artifacts caused by encoding of an image. The deblocking filter 24 filters the decoded image data input from the adder unit 23 to remove (or at least reduce) block artifacts, and outputs the filtered decoded image data to the frame memory 25.

帧存储器25使用存储介质存储从加法器单元23输入的解码图像数据和从去块滤波器24输入的滤波后的解码图像数据。The frame memory 25 stores the decoded image data input from the adder unit 23 and the filtered decoded image data input from the deblocking filter 24 using a storage medium.

选择器26从帧存储器25读取用于帧内预测的待滤波的解码图像数据,并且将读取的解码图像数据提供给帧内预测单元30作为参考图像数据。选择器26还从帧存储器25读取用于帧间预测的滤波后的解码图像数据,并且将读取的解码图像数据提供给运动搜索单元40作为参考图像数据。The selector 26 reads decoded image data to be filtered for intra prediction from the frame memory 25, and supplies the read decoded image data as reference image data to the intra prediction unit 30. The selector 26 also reads decoded image data after filtering for inter prediction from the frame memory 25, and supplies the read decoded image data as reference image data to the motion search unit 40.

帧内预测单元30基于从重新排列缓冲器12输入的待编码的图像数据和经由选择器26提供的解码图像数据,在每个帧内预测模式下执行帧内预测处理。例如,帧内预测单元30使用预定的成本函数评估在每个帧内预测模式下获得的预测结果。然后,帧内预测单元30选择使成本函数值最小化的帧内预测模式(也就是说,提供最高压缩比的帧内预测模式)作为最佳帧内预测模式。另外,帧内预测单元30将指示最佳帧内预测模式的预测模式信息、预测图像数据和关于帧内预测的信息(诸如,成本函数值)输出到模式选择单元50。The intra-frame prediction unit 30 performs intra-frame prediction processing in each intra-frame prediction mode based on the image data to be encoded input from the rearrangement buffer 12 and the decoded image data provided via the selector 26. For example, the intra-frame prediction unit 30 evaluates the prediction results obtained in each intra-frame prediction mode using a predetermined cost function. The intra-frame prediction unit 30 then selects the intra-frame prediction mode that minimizes the cost function value (that is, the intra-frame prediction mode that provides the highest compression ratio) as the optimal intra-frame prediction mode. In addition, the intra-frame prediction unit 30 outputs prediction mode information indicating the optimal intra-frame prediction mode, the predicted image data, and information about the intra-frame prediction (such as the cost function value) to the mode selection unit 50.

运动搜索单元40基于从重新排列缓冲器12输入的待编码的图像数据和经由选择器26提供的解码图像数据执行帧间预测处理(或帧之间预测处理)。例如,运动搜索单元40使用预定的成本函数评估在每个预测模式下获得的预测结果。然后,运动搜索单元40选择使成本函数值最小化的预测模式(也就是说,提供最高压缩比的预测模式)作为最佳预测模式。另外,运动搜索单元40根据最佳预测模式产生预测图像数据。运动搜索单元40将包括指示选择的最佳预测模式的预测模式信息的关于帧间预测的信息、预测图像数据和诸如成本函数值的关于帧间预测的信息输出到模式选择单元50。The motion search unit 40 performs an inter-frame prediction process (or inter-frame prediction process) based on the image data to be encoded input from the rearrangement buffer 12 and the decoded image data supplied via the selector 26. For example, the motion search unit 40 evaluates the prediction results obtained in each prediction mode using a predetermined cost function. The motion search unit 40 then selects the prediction mode that minimizes the cost function value (that is, the prediction mode that provides the highest compression ratio) as the optimal prediction mode. In addition, the motion search unit 40 generates predicted image data based on the optimal prediction mode. The motion search unit 40 outputs information on inter-frame prediction, including prediction mode information indicating the selected optimal prediction mode, predicted image data, and information on inter-frame prediction such as the cost function value, to the mode selection unit 50.

模式选择单元50将从帧内预测单元30输入的用于帧内预测的成本函数值与从运动搜索单元40输入的用于帧间预测的成本函数值进行比较。然后,模式选择单元50选择具有用于帧内预测和帧间预测的成本函数值中的较小的成本函数值的预测技术。如果选择了帧内预测,则模式选择单元50将关于帧内预测的信息输出到无损编码单元16,并且还将预测图像数据输出到减法单元13和加法器单元23。替代地,如果选择了帧间预测,则模式选择单元50将上述关于帧间预测的信息输出到无损编码单元16,并且还将预测图像数据输出到减法单元13和加法器单元23。The mode selection unit 50 compares the cost function value for intra prediction input from the intra prediction unit 30 with the cost function value for inter prediction input from the motion search unit 40. The mode selection unit 50 then selects the prediction technique having the smaller cost function value of the cost function values for intra prediction and inter prediction. If intra prediction is selected, the mode selection unit 50 outputs information about intra prediction to the lossless encoding unit 16 and also outputs predicted image data to the subtraction unit 13 and the adder unit 23. Alternatively, if inter prediction is selected, the mode selection unit 50 outputs the above-mentioned information about inter prediction to the lossless encoding unit 16 and also outputs predicted image data to the subtraction unit 13 and the adder unit 23.

<2-3.正交变换/量化单元的示例配置><2-3. Example Configuration of Orthogonal Transform/Quantization Unit>

图15是表示图14中示出的图像编码装置10的正交变换/量化单元14的详细配置的例子的方框图。参照图15,正交变换/量化单元14包括选择单元110、正交变换单元120、量化单元130、缩放列表缓冲器140和矩阵处理单元150。15 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a detailed configuration of the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 of the image encoding device 10 shown in FIG 14. Referring to FIG 15 , the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 includes a selection unit 110, an orthogonal transform unit 120, a quantization unit 130, a scaling list buffer 140, and a matrix processing unit 150.

(1)选择单元(1) Select unit

选择单元110从具有不同尺寸的多个变换单位之中选择用于待编码的图像数据的正交变换的变换单位(TU)。可由选择单元110选择的变换单位的可能的尺寸的例子包括用于H.264/AVC(高级视频编码)的4×4和8×8,并且包括用于HEVC(高效率视频编码)的4×4、8×8、16×16和32×32。选择单元110可根据例如待编码的图像的尺寸或质量、图像编码装置10的性能等选择变换单位。由选择单元110对变换单位的选择可由开发图像编码装置10的用户手工调整。其后,选择单元110将指定所选择的变换单位的尺寸的信息输出到正交变换单元120、量化单元130、无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。The selection unit 110 selects a transform unit (TU) for orthogonal transform of the image data to be encoded from among a plurality of transform units having different sizes. Examples of possible sizes of the transform unit that can be selected by the selection unit 110 include 4×4 and 8×8 for H.264/AVC (Advanced Video Coding), and 4×4, 8×8, 16×16, and 32×32 for HEVC (High Efficiency Video Coding). The selection unit 110 can select the transform unit based on, for example, the size or quality of the image to be encoded, the performance of the image encoding device 10, etc. The selection of the transform unit by the selection unit 110 can be manually adjusted by the user who develops the image encoding device 10. Thereafter, the selection unit 110 outputs information specifying the size of the selected transform unit to the orthogonal transform unit 120, the quantization unit 130, the lossless encoding unit 16, and the dequantization unit 21.

(2)正交变换单元(2) Orthogonal Transformation Unit

正交变换单元120以由选择单元110选择的变换单位为单位,对从减法单元13提供的图像数据(也就是说,预测误差数据)执行正交变换。由正交变换单元120执行的正交变换可以是例如离散余弦变换(DCT)、Karhunen-Loève变换等。其后,正交变换单元120将通过正交变换处理获取的变换系数数据输出到量化单元130。The orthogonal transform unit 120 performs an orthogonal transform on the image data (that is, the prediction error data) supplied from the subtraction unit 13 in units of the transform unit selected by the selection unit 110. The orthogonal transform performed by the orthogonal transform unit 120 may be, for example, a discrete cosine transform (DCT), a Karhunen-Loève transform, or the like. Thereafter, the orthogonal transform unit 120 outputs the transform coefficient data obtained through the orthogonal transform process to the quantization unit 130.

(3)量化单元(3) Quantization unit

量化单元130通过使用与由选择单元110选择的变换单位对应的缩放列表来量化由正交变换单元120产生的变换系数数据。另外,量化单元130根据从速率控制单元18提供的速率控制信号切换量化步长尺寸,以改变将要输出的量化的数据的比特率。The quantization unit 130 quantizes the transform coefficient data generated by the orthogonal transform unit 120 by using the scaling list corresponding to the transform unit selected by the selection unit 110. In addition, the quantization unit 130 switches the quantization step size according to the rate control signal provided from the rate control unit 18 to change the bit rate of the quantized data to be output.

另外,量化单元130使得分别与可由选择单元110选择的多个变换单位对应的各组缩放列表被存储在缩放列表缓冲器140中。例如,在HEVC中,如果存在四种可能的变换单位的尺寸,即4×4、8×8、16×16和32×32,则分别与这四种尺寸对应的四组缩放列表可被存储在缩放列表缓冲器140中。注意,如果指定的缩放列表被用于给定的尺寸,则仅指示使用指定的缩放列表(不使用由用户定义的缩放列表)的标记可被与给定的尺寸相关联地存储在缩放列表缓冲器140中。In addition, the quantization unit 130 causes groups of scaling lists corresponding to the plurality of transform units selectable by the selection unit 110 to be stored in the scaling list buffer 140. For example, in HEVC, if there are four possible sizes of transform units, namely, 4×4, 8×8, 16×16, and 32×32, four groups of scaling lists corresponding to the four sizes, respectively, may be stored in the scaling list buffer 140. Note that if a designated scaling list is used for a given size, only a flag indicating that the designated scaling list is used (a scaling list defined by the user is not used) may be stored in the scaling list buffer 140 in association with the given size.

通常可针对编码流的每个序列设置可由量化单元130使用的一组缩放列表。另外,量化单元130可在逐图像基础上更新针对每个序列设置的一组缩放列表。用于控制一组缩放列表的设置和更新的信息可被插入在例如序列参数集和图片参数集中。Generally, a set of scaling lists that can be used by the quantization unit 130 may be set for each sequence of the coded stream. In addition, the quantization unit 130 may update the set of scaling lists set for each sequence on a picture-by-picture basis. Information for controlling the setting and updating of the set of scaling lists may be inserted into, for example, a sequence parameter set and a picture parameter set.

(4)缩放列表缓冲器(4) Scaling List Buffer

缩放列表缓冲器140使用存储介质(诸如,半导体存储器)临时地存储分别与可由选择单元110选择的多个变换单位对应的一组缩放列表。当矩阵处理单元150执行以下描述的处理时,参照存储在缩放列表缓冲器140中的所述一组缩放列表。The scaling list buffer 140 temporarily stores a set of scaling lists respectively corresponding to a plurality of transform units selectable by the selection unit 110 using a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory. When the matrix processing unit 150 performs the processing described below, the set of scaling lists stored in the scaling list buffer 140 is referred to.

(5)矩阵处理单元(5) Matrix processing unit

矩阵处理单元150对将要被用于编码(量化)的缩放列表进行编码。其后,由矩阵处理单元150产生的缩放列表的编码数据(在下文中被称为编码缩放列表数据)被输出到无损编码单元16,并且可被插入到编码流的头部中。The matrix processing unit 150 encodes the scaling list to be used for encoding (quantization). Thereafter, the encoded data of the scaling list generated by the matrix processing unit 150 (hereinafter referred to as encoded scaling list data) is output to the lossless encoding unit 16 and can be inserted into the header of the encoded stream.

<2-4.矩阵处理单元的详细示例配置><2-4. Detailed Example Configuration of Matrix Processing Unit>

图16是表示矩阵处理单元150的更详细的配置的例子的方框图。参照图16,矩阵处理单元150包括预测单元161、差矩阵产生单元162、差矩阵尺寸变换单元163、熵编码单元164、解码单元165和输出单元166。16 is a block diagram showing a more detailed configuration example of the matrix processing unit 150. Referring to FIG16, the matrix processing unit 150 includes a prediction unit 161, a difference matrix generation unit 162, a difference matrix size conversion unit 163, an entropy encoding unit 164, a decoding unit 165, and an output unit 166.

(1)预测单元(1) Prediction unit

预测单元161产生预测矩阵。如图16中所示,预测单元161包括复制单元171和预测矩阵产生单元172。The prediction unit 161 generates a prediction matrix. As shown in FIG16 , the prediction unit 161 includes a copy unit 171 and a prediction matrix generation unit 172.

在复制模式下,复制单元171复制以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用复制的量化矩阵作为预测矩阵(或预测待处理的正交变换单位的缩放列表)。更具体地,复制单元171从解码单元165中的存储单元202获取以前发送的缩放列表的尺寸和列表ID(ListID)。尺寸是指示缩放列表的尺寸的信息(从例如4×4到32×32的范围)。列表ID是指示待量化的预测误差数据的类型的信息。In copy mode, the copy unit 171 copies the previously transmitted scaling list and uses the copied quantization matrix as a prediction matrix (or a scaling list for predicting the orthogonal transform unit to be processed). More specifically, the copy unit 171 obtains the size and list ID (ListID) of the previously transmitted scaling list from the storage unit 202 in the decoding unit 165. The size is information indicating the size of the scaling list (ranging from 4×4 to 32×32, for example). The list ID is information indicating the type of prediction error data to be quantized.

例如,列表ID包括识别信息,该识别信息指示待量化的预测误差数据是使用经受帧内预测的预测图像产生的亮度分量的预测误差数据(Intra Luma)、使用经受帧内预测的预测图像产生的色差分量(Cr)的预测误差数据(Intra Cr)、使用经受帧内预测的预测图像产生的色差分量(Cb)的预测误差数据(Intra Cb)、或使用经受帧间预测的预测图像产生的亮度分量的预测误差数据(Inter Luma)。For example, the list ID includes identification information indicating whether the prediction error data to be quantized is prediction error data of a luminance component generated using a prediction image subjected to intra prediction (Intra Luma), prediction error data of a color difference component (Cr) generated using a prediction image subjected to intra prediction (Intra Cr), prediction error data of a color difference component (Cb) generated using a prediction image subjected to intra prediction (Intra Cb), or prediction error data of a luminance component generated using a prediction image subjected to inter prediction (Inter Luma).

复制单元171选择与输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表(待处理的正交变换单位的缩放列表)相同尺寸的以前发送的缩放列表作为待复制的缩放列表,并且将待复制的缩放列表的列表ID提供给输出单元166以将列表ID输出到在矩阵处理单元150外面的装置(无损编码单元16和去量化单元21)。也就是说,在这种情况下,仅列表ID被发送给解码侧(或被包括在编码数据中)作为指示通过复制以前发送的缩放列表产生的预测矩阵的信息。因此,图像编码装置10可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。The copying unit 171 selects a previously transmitted scaling list of the same size as the scaling list input to the matrix processing unit 150 (the scaling list of the orthogonal transform unit to be processed) as the scaling list to be copied, and provides the list ID of the scaling list to be copied to the output unit 166 to output the list ID to the device outside the matrix processing unit 150 (the lossless encoding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21). In other words, in this case, only the list ID is transmitted to the decoding side (or included in the encoded data) as information indicating the prediction matrix generated by copying the previously transmitted scaling list. Therefore, the image encoding device 10 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

另外,在正常模式下,预测矩阵产生单元172从解码单元165中的存储单元202获取以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用该缩放列表产生预测矩阵(或预测待处理的正交变换单位的缩放列表)。预测矩阵产生单元172将产生的预测矩阵提供给差矩阵产生单元162。In addition, in normal mode, the prediction matrix generation unit 172 obtains the previously transmitted scaling list from the storage unit 202 in the decoding unit 165 and uses the scaling list to generate a prediction matrix (or predict the scaling list of the orthogonal transform unit to be processed). The prediction matrix generation unit 172 provides the generated prediction matrix to the difference matrix generation unit 162.

(2)差矩阵产生单元(2) Difference matrix generation unit

差矩阵产生单元162产生差矩阵(残差矩阵),该差矩阵(残差矩阵)是从预测单元161(预测矩阵产生单元172)提供的预测矩阵与输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表之差。如图16中所示,差矩阵产生单元162包括预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181、计算单元182和量化单元183。The difference matrix generation unit 162 generates a difference matrix (residual matrix) which is a difference between the prediction matrix supplied from the prediction unit 161 (prediction matrix generation unit 172) and the scaling list input to the matrix processing unit 150. As shown in FIG16 , the difference matrix generation unit 162 includes a prediction matrix size conversion unit 181, a calculation unit 182, and a quantization unit 183.

预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181变换(在下文中也被称为转换)从预测矩阵产生单元172提供的预测矩阵的尺寸,以使得预测矩阵的尺寸与输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表的尺寸匹配。The prediction matrix size transforming unit 181 transforms (hereinafter also referred to as converting) the size of the prediction matrix supplied from the prediction matrix generating unit 172 so that the size of the prediction matrix matches the size of the scaling list input to the matrix processing unit 150 .

例如,如果预测矩阵的尺寸大于缩放列表的尺寸,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181向下转换(在下文中也被称为下转换)预测矩阵。更具体地,例如,当预测矩阵具有16×16尺寸并且缩放列表具有8×8尺寸时,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181将预测矩阵下转换为8×8预测矩阵。注意,可使用用于下转换的任何方法。例如,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181可通过使用滤波器(通过计算)来减少预测矩阵中的元素的数量(在下文中也被称为下采样)。替代地,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181也可通过例如如图17中所示去除一些元素(例如,二维元素之中的仅偶数编号的元素(在图17中,实心黑色的元素))来减少预测矩阵中的元素的数量而不使用滤波器(在下文中也被称为子采样)。For example, if the size of the prediction matrix is larger than the size of the scaling list, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 down-converts (hereinafter also referred to as down-conversion) the prediction matrix. More specifically, for example, when the prediction matrix has a size of 16×16 and the scaling list has a size of 8×8, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 down-converts the prediction matrix into an 8×8 prediction matrix. Note that any method for down-conversion can be used. For example, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 can reduce the number of elements in the prediction matrix by using a filter (by calculation) (hereinafter also referred to as downsampling). Alternatively, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 can also reduce the number of elements in the prediction matrix without using a filter (hereinafter also referred to as subsampling) by removing some elements (for example, only even-numbered elements among the two-dimensional elements (in FIG. 17 , solid black elements)), for example, as shown in FIG.

另外,例如,如果预测矩阵的尺寸小于缩放列表的尺寸,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181向上转换(在下文中也被称为上转换)预测矩阵。更具体地,例如,当预测矩阵具有8×8尺寸并且缩放列表具有16×16尺寸时,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181将预测矩阵上转换为16×16预测矩阵。注意,可使用用于上转换的任何方法。例如,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181可通过使用滤波器(通过计算)来增加预测矩阵中的元素的数量(在下文中也被称为上采样)。替代地,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181也可通过例如复制预测矩阵中的各元素来增加预测矩阵中的元素的数量而不使用滤波器(在下文中也被称为逆子采样)。In addition, for example, if the size of the prediction matrix is smaller than the size of the scaling list, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 converts the prediction matrix upward (hereinafter also referred to as up-conversion). More specifically, for example, when the prediction matrix has an 8×8 size and the scaling list has a 16×16 size, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 converts the prediction matrix upward into a 16×16 prediction matrix. Note that any method for up-conversion can be used. For example, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 may increase the number of elements in the prediction matrix by using a filter (by calculation) (hereinafter also referred to as upsampling). Alternatively, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 may also increase the number of elements in the prediction matrix by, for example, copying each element in the prediction matrix without using a filter (hereinafter also referred to as inverse subsampling).

预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181将其尺寸已与缩放列表的尺寸匹配的预测矩阵提供给计算单元182。The prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 supplies the prediction matrix whose size has been matched with the size of the scaling list to the calculation unit 182 .

计算单元182用从预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181提供的预测矩阵减去输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表,并且产生差矩阵(残差矩阵)。计算单元182将计算的差矩阵提供给量化单元183。The calculation unit 182 subtracts the scaling list input to the matrix processing unit 150 from the prediction matrix supplied from the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 and generates a difference matrix (residual matrix). The calculation unit 182 supplies the calculated difference matrix to the quantization unit 183.

量化单元183对从计算单元182提供的差矩阵进行量化。量化单元183将量化的差矩阵提供给差矩阵尺寸变换单元163。量化单元183还将用于量化的信息(诸如,量化参数)提供给输出单元166以将该信息输出到在矩阵处理单元150外面的装置(无损编码单元16和去量化单元21)。注意,量化单元183可被省略(也就是说,可不必执行差矩阵的量化)。The quantization unit 183 quantizes the difference matrix supplied from the calculation unit 182. The quantization unit 183 supplies the quantized difference matrix to the difference matrix size conversion unit 163. The quantization unit 183 also supplies information used for quantization (such as a quantization parameter) to the output unit 166 to output the information to a device (lossless encoding unit 16 and dequantization unit 21) outside the matrix processing unit 150. Note that the quantization unit 183 may be omitted (that is, it may not be necessary to perform quantization of the difference matrix).

(3)差矩阵尺寸变换单元(3) Difference Matrix Size Transformation Unit

如果需要,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元163将从差矩阵产生单元162(量化单元183)提供的差矩阵(量化的数据)的尺寸转换成小于或等于在发送中允许的最大尺寸(在下文中也被称为发送尺寸)的尺寸。该最大尺寸可具有任何可选的值,并且例如是8×8。If necessary, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 converts the size of the difference matrix (quantized data) provided from the difference matrix generation unit 162 (quantization unit 183) into a size smaller than or equal to the maximum size allowed for transmission (hereinafter also referred to as the transmission size). This maximum size can have any selectable value and is, for example, 8×8.

从图像编码装置10输出的编码数据经由例如传输路径或存储介质被发送给与图像编码装置10对应的图像解码装置,并且由图像解码装置进行解码。在图像编码装置10中设置有在这种传输期间或在从图像编码装置10输出的编码数据中的差矩阵(量化的数据)的尺寸的上限(最大尺寸)。The encoded data output from the image encoding device 10 is transmitted to an image decoding device corresponding to the image encoding device 10 via, for example, a transmission path or a storage medium, and is decoded by the image decoding device. The image encoding device 10 is provided with an upper limit (maximum size) on the size of the difference matrix (quantized data) during such transmission or in the encoded data output from the image encoding device 10.

如果差矩阵的尺寸大于最大尺寸,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元163下转换差矩阵,以使得差矩阵的尺寸变为小于或等于最大尺寸。If the size of the difference matrix is larger than the maximum size, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 down-converts the difference matrix so that the size of the difference matrix becomes smaller than or equal to the maximum size.

注意,类似于上述预测矩阵的下转换,可使用任何方法对差矩阵进行下转换。例如,可使用滤波器等执行下采样,或者可执行包括去除元素的子采样。Note that, similar to the down-conversion of the prediction matrix described above, the difference matrix can be down-converted using any method. For example, down-sampling can be performed using a filter or the like, or sub-sampling including removing elements can be performed.

另外,下转换后的差矩阵可具有小于最大尺寸的任何尺寸。然而,通常,在转换之前与在转换之后的尺寸的差越大,误差变得越大。因此,希望差矩阵被下转换为最大尺寸。In addition, the difference matrix after down-conversion can have any size less than the maximum size. However, in general, the larger the difference between the size before and after conversion, the larger the error becomes. Therefore, it is desirable that the difference matrix be down-converted to the maximum size.

差矩阵尺寸变换单元163将下转换后的差矩阵提供给熵编码单元164。注意,如果差矩阵的尺寸小于最大尺寸,则不需要上述下转换,并且因此,差矩阵尺寸变换单元163将输入到它的差矩阵按原样提供给熵编码单元164(也就是说,差矩阵的下转换被省略)。The difference matrix size transforming unit 163 supplies the down-converted difference matrix to the entropy encoding unit 164. Note that if the size of the difference matrix is smaller than the maximum size, the above-described down-conversion is unnecessary, and therefore, the difference matrix size transforming unit 163 supplies the difference matrix input thereto as it is to the entropy encoding unit 164 (that is, down-conversion of the difference matrix is omitted).

(4)熵编码单元(4) Entropy coding unit

熵编码单元164使用预定方法对从差矩阵尺寸变换单元163提供的差矩阵(量化的数据)进行编码。如图16中所示,熵编码单元164包括交叠确定单元(135度单元)191、DPCM(差分脉冲编码调制)单元192和exp-G单元193。The entropy encoding unit 164 encodes the difference matrix (quantized data) supplied from the difference matrix size transform unit 163 using a predetermined method. As shown in FIG16 , the entropy encoding unit 164 includes an overlap determination unit (135 degree unit) 191, a DPCM (Differential Pulse Code Modulation) unit 192, and an exp-G unit 193.

交叠确定单元191确定从差矩阵尺寸变换单元163提供的差矩阵的对称性。例如,如图18中所示,如果残差(差矩阵)代表135度对称矩阵,则交叠确定单元191去除作为交叠数据的对称部分的数据(矩阵元素)。如果残差矩阵不代表135度对称矩阵,则交叠确定单元191省略数据(矩阵元素)的去除。交叠确定单元191将已从其去除了对称部分(如果需要的话)的差矩阵的数据提供给DPCM单元192。The overlap determination unit 191 determines the symmetry of the difference matrix provided from the difference matrix size conversion unit 163. For example, as shown in FIG18 , if the residual (difference matrix) represents a 135-degree symmetric matrix, the overlap determination unit 191 removes the data (matrix elements) of the symmetric portion, which is the overlap data. If the residual matrix does not represent a 135-degree symmetric matrix, the overlap determination unit 191 omits the removal of the data (matrix elements). The overlap determination unit 191 provides the data of the difference matrix, from which the symmetric portion (if necessary) has been removed, to the DPCM unit 192.

DPCM单元192执行从交叠确定单元191提供的已从其去除了对称部分(如果需要的话)的差矩阵的数据的DPCM编码,并且产生DPCM数据。DPCM单元192将产生的DPCM数据提供给exp-G单元193。The DPCM unit 192 performs DPCM encoding on the data of the difference matrix from which the symmetric portion (if necessary) has been removed, supplied from the overlap determination unit 191 , and generates DPCM data. The DPCM unit 192 supplies the generated DPCM data to the exp-G unit 193 .

exp-G单元193使用有符号或无符号指数Golomb码(在下文中也被称为指数Golomb码)对从DPCM单元192提供的DPCM数据进行编码。exp-G单元193将编码结果提供给解码单元165和输出单元166。The exp-G unit 193 encodes the DPCM data supplied from the DPCM unit 192 using a signed or unsigned exponential Golomb code (hereinafter also referred to as an exponential Golomb code). The exp-G unit 193 supplies the encoding result to the decoding unit 165 and the output unit 166.

(5)解码单元(5) Decoding unit

解码单元165从由exp-G单元193提供的数据恢复缩放列表。解码单元165将关于恢复的缩放列表的信息提供给预测单元161作为以前发送的缩放列表。The decoding unit 165 restores the scaling list from the data provided by the exp-G unit 193. The decoding unit 165 provides information on the restored scaling list to the prediction unit 161 as the previously transmitted scaling list.

如图16中所示,解码单元165包括缩放列表恢复单元201和存储单元202。As shown in FIG. 16 , the decoding unit 165 includes a scaling list restoring unit 201 and a storage unit 202 .

缩放列表恢复单元201对从熵编码单元164(exp-G单元193)提供的指数Golomb码进行解码,以恢复将要被输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表。例如,缩放列表恢复单元201使用与熵编码单元164的编码方法对应的方法对指数Golomb码进行解码,以及通过执行与由差矩阵尺寸变换单元163执行的尺寸变换相反的变换并且执行与由量化单元183执行的量化对应的去量化来获得差矩阵。缩放列表恢复单元201还用预测矩阵减去获得的差矩阵以恢复缩放列表。The scaling list restoration unit 201 decodes the exponential Golomb code supplied from the entropy encoding unit 164 (exp-G unit 193) to restore the scaling list to be input to the matrix processing unit 150. For example, the scaling list restoration unit 201 decodes the exponential Golomb code using a method corresponding to the encoding method of the entropy encoding unit 164, and obtains a difference matrix by performing a transform inverse to the size transform performed by the difference matrix size transform unit 163 and performing dequantization corresponding to the quantization performed by the quantization unit 183. The scaling list restoration unit 201 also subtracts the obtained difference matrix from the prediction matrix to restore the scaling list.

缩放列表恢复单元201将恢复的缩放列表提供给存储单元202,以便与缩放列表的尺寸和列表ID相关联地存储。The zoom list restoring unit 201 supplies the restored zoom list to the storage unit 202 for storage in association with the size and list ID of the zoom list.

存储单元202存储关于从缩放列表恢复单元201提供的缩放列表的信息。存储在存储单元202中的关于缩放列表的信息被用于产生在稍后时间处理的其它正交变换单位的预测矩阵。也就是说,存储单元202将存储的关于缩放列表的信息提供给预测单元161作为关于以前发送的缩放列表的信息。The storage unit 202 stores information about the scaling list provided from the scaling list restoration unit 201. The information about the scaling list stored in the storage unit 202 is used to generate a prediction matrix for another orthogonal transform unit processed at a later time. That is, the storage unit 202 provides the stored information about the scaling list to the prediction unit 161 as information about the previously transmitted scaling list.

注意,替代存储关于以上述方式恢复的缩放列表的信息,存储单元202可与输入的缩放列表的尺寸和列表ID相关联地存储输入到矩阵处理单元150的缩放列表。在这种情况下,缩放列表恢复单元201可以被省略。Note that instead of storing information about the scaling list restored in the above manner, the storage unit 202 may store the scaling list input to the matrix processing unit 150 in association with its size and list ID. In this case, the scaling list restoration unit 201 may be omitted.

(6)输出单元(6) Output unit

输出单元166将提供的各种类型的信息输出到在矩阵处理单元150外面的装置。例如,在复制模式下,输出单元166将从复制单元171提供的预测矩阵的列表ID提供给无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。另外,例如,在正常模式下,输出单元166将从exp-G单元193提供的指数Golomb码和从量化单元183提供的量化参数提供给无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。The output unit 166 outputs the supplied various types of information to a device outside the matrix processing unit 150. For example, in the copy mode, the output unit 166 supplies the list ID of the prediction matrix supplied from the copy unit 171 to the lossless encoding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21. In addition, for example, in the normal mode, the output unit 166 supplies the exponential Golomb code supplied from the exp-G unit 193 and the quantization parameter supplied from the quantization unit 183 to the lossless encoding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21.

输出单元166还将指示在缩放列表(或缩放列表及其预测矩阵之间的差矩阵)的发送中允许的最大尺寸(发送尺寸)的识别信息提供给无损编码单元16作为用于在解码侧产生缩放列表的信息。如上所述,无损编码单元16创建包括用于产生缩放列表的信息的编码流,并且将编码流提供给解码侧。可由级别、规格等预先指定指示发送尺寸的识别信息。在这种情况下,预先在位于编码侧的设备和位于解码侧的设备之间共享关于发送尺寸的信息。因此,上述识别信息的发送可以被省略。The output unit 166 also provides identification information indicating the maximum size (transmission size) allowed in the transmission of the scaling list (or the difference matrix between the scaling list and its prediction matrix) to the lossless encoding unit 16 as information for generating the scaling list on the decoding side. As described above, the lossless encoding unit 16 creates a coded stream including information for generating the scaling list, and provides the coded stream to the decoding side. The identification information indicating the transmission size can be pre-specified by the level, specification, etc. In this case, the information about the transmission size is shared in advance between the device on the encoding side and the device on the decoding side. Therefore, the transmission of the above-mentioned identification information can be omitted.

<2-5.DPCM单元的详细示例配置><2-5. Detailed Example Configuration of DPCM Unit>

图19是表示DPCM单元192的更详细的配置的例子的方框图。参照图19,DPCM单元192包括DC系数编码单元211和AC系数DPCM单元212。19 is a block diagram showing an example of a more detailed configuration of the DPCM unit 192. Referring to FIG19, the DPCM unit 192 includes a DC coefficient encoding unit 211 and an AC coefficient DPCM unit 212.

DC系数编码单元211从由交叠确定单元191提供的系数之中获取DC系数,用预定初始值(例如,8)减去DC系数的值以确定差值,并且使用该差值作为初始(i=0)差值(scaling_list_delta_coef)。DC系数编码单元211将计算的差值(scaling_list_delta_coef(i=0))提供给exp-G单元193,作为与正被处理的关注区域对应的缩放列表的初始系数。The DC coefficient encoding unit 211 obtains a DC coefficient from the coefficients provided by the overlap determination unit 191, subtracts the value of the DC coefficient from a predetermined initial value (e.g., 8) to determine a difference value, and uses the difference value as an initial (i=0) difference value (scaling_list_delta_coef). The DC coefficient encoding unit 211 provides the calculated difference value (scaling_list_delta_coef (i=0)) to the exp-G unit 193 as the initial coefficient of the scaling list corresponding to the attention area being processed.

AC系数DPCM单元212从由交叠确定单元191提供的系数之中获取AC系数,并且用前一个处理的系数减去AC系数的值以确定差值(scaling_list_delta_coef(i>0))。AC系数DPCM单元212将确定的差值(scaling_list_delta_coef(i>0))提供给exp-G单元193,作为与正被处理的关注区域对应的缩放列表的系数。注意,当i=1时,前一个系数由i=0代表。因此,“DC系数”是前一个处理的系数。The AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 obtains an AC coefficient from the coefficients provided by the overlap determination unit 191, and subtracts the value of the AC coefficient from the coefficient of the previous process to determine a difference value (scaling_list_delta_coef(i>0)). The AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 provides the determined difference value (scaling_list_delta_coef(i>0)) to the exp-G unit 193 as the coefficient of the scaling list corresponding to the target area being processed. Note that when i=1, the previous coefficient is represented by i=0. Therefore, the "DC coefficient" is the coefficient of the previous process.

以这种方式,DPCM单元192可以发送DC系数作为位于缩放列表(AC系数)的开始的元素。因此,可以提高缩放列表的编码效率。In this manner, the DPCM unit 192 can transmit the DC coefficient as an element located at the beginning of the scaling list (AC coefficient), thereby improving the encoding efficiency of the scaling list.

<2-6.量化矩阵编码处理的流程><2-6. Flow of Quantization Matrix Coding Processing>

接下来,将参照图20中示出的流程图描述由图16中示出的矩阵处理单元150执行的量化矩阵编码处理的流程的例子。Next, an example of the flow of the quantization matrix encoding process performed by the matrix processing unit 150 shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 .

当量化矩阵编码处理开始时,在步骤S101中,预测单元161获取用于作为待处理的正交变换单位的当前区域(也被称为关注区域)的缩放列表(或量化矩阵)。When the quantization matrix encoding process starts, in step S101 , the prediction unit 161 acquires a scaling list (or quantization matrix) for a current region (also referred to as a focus region) which is an orthogonal transform unit to be processed.

在步骤S102中,预测单元161确定当前模式是否是复制模式。如果确定当前模式不是复制模式,则预测单元161使处理前进至步骤S103。In step S102, the prediction unit 161 determines whether the current mode is the copy mode. If it is determined that the current mode is not the copy mode, the prediction unit 161 advances the process to step S103.

在步骤S103中,预测矩阵产生单元172从存储单元202获取以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用该缩放列表产生预测矩阵。In step S103 , the prediction matrix generation unit 172 acquires the previously transmitted scaling list from the storage unit 202 , and generates a prediction matrix using the scaling list.

在步骤S104中,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181确定在步骤S103中产生的预测矩阵的尺寸是否不同于在步骤S101中获取的用于当前区域(关注区域)的缩放列表的尺寸。如果确定二者尺寸不同,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181使处理前进至步骤S105。In step S104, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 determines whether the size of the prediction matrix generated in step S103 is different from the size of the scaling list for the current region (region of interest) acquired in step S101. If it is determined that the sizes are different, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 advances the process to step S105.

在步骤S105中,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181将在步骤S103中产生的预测矩阵的尺寸转换为在步骤S101中获取的用于当前区域的缩放列表的尺寸。In step S105 , the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 converts the size of the prediction matrix generated in step S103 into the size of the scaling list for the current region acquired in step S101 .

当步骤S105的处理完成时,预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181使处理前进至步骤S106。如果在步骤S104中确定预测矩阵的尺寸与缩放列表的尺寸相同,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181使处理前进至步骤S106,同时跳过步骤S105的处理(或不执行步骤S105的处理)。When the process of step S105 is completed, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 advances the process to step S106. If it is determined in step S104 that the size of the prediction matrix is the same as the size of the scaling list, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 advances the process to step S106 while skipping the process of step S105 (or not executing the process of step S105).

在步骤S106中,计算单元182用预测矩阵减去缩放列表以计算预测矩阵与缩放列表之间的差矩阵。In step S106 , the calculation unit 182 subtracts the scaling list from the prediction matrix to calculate a difference matrix between the prediction matrix and the scaling list.

在步骤S107中,量化单元183量化在步骤S106中产生的差矩阵。注意,这个处理可被省略。In step S107, the quantization unit 183 quantizes the difference matrix generated in step S106. Note that this processing can be omitted.

在步骤S108中,差矩阵尺寸变换单元163确定量化的差矩阵的尺寸是否大于发送尺寸(在发送中允许的最大尺寸)。如果确定量化的差矩阵的尺寸大于发送尺寸,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元163使处理前进至步骤S109,并且将差矩阵下转换为发送尺寸或更小。In step S108, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 determines whether the size of the quantized difference matrix is larger than the transmission size (the maximum size allowed in transmission). If it is determined that the size of the quantized difference matrix is larger than the transmission size, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 advances the process to step S109 and down-converts the difference matrix to the transmission size or smaller.

当步骤S109的处理完成时,差矩阵尺寸变换单元163使处理前进至步骤S110。另外,如果在步骤S108中确定量化的差矩阵的尺寸小于或等于发送尺寸,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元163使处理前进至步骤S110,同时跳过步骤S109的处理(或不执行步骤S109的处理)。When the process of step S109 is completed, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 advances the process to step S110. In addition, if it is determined in step S108 that the size of the quantized difference matrix is less than or equal to the transmission size, the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 advances the process to step S110 while skipping the process of step S109 (or not executing the process of step S109).

在步骤S110中,交叠确定单元191确定量化的差矩阵是否具有135度对称。如果确定量化的差矩阵具有135度对称,则交叠确定单元191使处理前进至步骤S111。In step S110, the overlap determination unit 191 determines whether the quantized difference matrix has 135-degree symmetry. If it is determined that the quantized difference matrix has 135-degree symmetry, the overlap determination unit 191 advances the process to step S111.

在步骤S111中,交叠确定单元191去除量化的差矩阵中的交叠部分(交叠数据)。在交叠数据被去除之后,交叠确定单元191使处理前进至步骤S112。In step S111, the overlap determination unit 191 removes the overlapping portion (overlapping data) in the quantized difference matrix. After the overlapping data is removed, the overlap determination unit 191 advances the process to step S112.

另外,如果在步骤S110中确定量化的差矩阵不具有135度对称,则交叠确定单元191使处理前进至步骤S112,同时跳过步骤S111的处理(或不执行步骤S111的处理)。In addition, if it is determined in step S110 that the quantized difference matrix does not have 135-degree symmetry, the overlap determination unit 191 advances the process to step S112 while skipping the process of step S111 (or not performing the process of step S111 ).

在步骤S112中,DPCM单元192对已从其去除了交叠部分(如果需要的话)的差矩阵执行DPCM编码。In step S112 , the DPCM unit 192 performs DPCM encoding on the difference matrix from which the overlapping portion has been removed if necessary.

在步骤S113中,exp-G单元193确定在步骤S112中产生的DPCM数据是否具有正号或负号。如果确定包括符号,则exp-G单元193使处理前进至步骤S114。In step S113, the exp-G unit 193 determines whether the DPCM data generated in step S112 has a positive sign or a negative sign. If it is determined that the sign is included, the exp-G unit 193 advances the process to step S114.

在步骤S114中,exp-G单元193使用有符号指数Golomb编码对DPCM数据进行编码。输出单元166将产生的指数Golomb码输出到无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。当步骤S114的处理完成时,exp-G单元193使处理前进至步骤S116。In step S114, the exp-G unit 193 encodes the DPCM data using signed exponential Golomb coding. The output unit 166 outputs the generated exponential Golomb code to the lossless coding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21. When the process of step S114 is completed, the exp-G unit 193 advances the process to step S116.

另外,如果在步骤S113中确定不包括符号,则exp-G单元193使处理前进至步骤S115。In addition, if it is determined in step S113 that the symbol is not included, the exp-G unit 193 advances the process to step S115 .

在步骤S115中,exp-G单元193使用无符号指数Golomb编码对DPCM数据进行编码。输出单元166将产生的指数Golomb码输出到无损编码单元16和去量化单元21。当步骤S115的处理完成时,exp-G单元193使处理前进至步骤S116。In step S115, the exp-G unit 193 encodes the DPCM data using unsigned exponential Golomb coding. The output unit 166 outputs the generated exponential Golomb code to the lossless coding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21. When the process of step S115 is completed, the exp-G unit 193 advances the process to step S116.

另外,如果在步骤S102中确定当前模式是复制模式,则复制单元171复制以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用复制的缩放列表作为预测矩阵。输出单元166将与预测矩阵对应的列表ID输出到无损编码单元16和去量化单元21作为指示预测矩阵的信息。然后,复制单元171使处理前进至步骤S116。If the current mode is determined to be the copy mode in step S102, the copy unit 171 copies the previously transmitted scaling list and uses the copied scaling list as the prediction matrix. The output unit 166 outputs the list ID corresponding to the prediction matrix to the lossless encoding unit 16 and the dequantization unit 21 as information indicating the prediction matrix. The copy unit 171 then advances the process to step S116.

在步骤S116中,缩放列表恢复单元201恢复缩放列表。在步骤S117中,存储单元202存储在步骤S116中恢复的缩放列表。In step S116, the zoom list restoring unit 201 restores the zoom list. In step S117, the storage unit 202 stores the zoom list restored in step S116.

当步骤S117的处理完成时,矩阵处理单元150结束量化矩阵编码处理。When the process of step S117 is completed, the matrix processing unit 150 ends the quantization matrix encoding process.

<2-7.DPCM处理的流程><2-7. DPCM Processing Flow>

接下来,将参照图21中示出的流程图描述在图20中的步骤S112中执行的DPCM处理的流程的例子。Next, an example of the flow of the DPCM process performed in step S112 in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 21 .

当DPCM处理开始时,在步骤S131中,DC系数编码单元211确定DC系数与常数之差。在步骤S132中,AC系数DPCM单元212确定DC系数与初始AC系数之差。When the DPCM process starts, in step S131, the DC coefficient encoding unit 211 determines the difference between the DC coefficient and a constant. In step S132, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 determines the difference between the DC coefficient and the initial AC coefficient.

在步骤S133中,AC系数DPCM单元212确定是否所有的AC系数已被处理。如果确定存在未处理的AC系数,则AC系数DPCM单元212使处理前进至步骤S134。In step S133, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 determines whether all AC coefficients have been processed. If it is determined that there is an unprocessed AC coefficient, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 advances the process to step S134.

在步骤S134中,AC系数DPCM单元212使处理目标改变为随后的AC系数。在步骤S135中,AC系数DPCM单元212确定之前处理的AC系数与正被处理的当前AC系数之差。当步骤S135的处理完成时,AC系数DPCM单元212使处理返回到步骤S133。In step S134, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 changes the processing target to the next AC coefficient. In step S135, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 determines the difference between the previously processed AC coefficient and the current AC coefficient being processed. When the processing of step S135 is completed, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 returns the processing to step S133.

以这种方式,只要在步骤S133中确定存在未处理的AC系数,AC系数DPCM单元212就重复地执行步骤S133至S135的处理。如果在步骤S133中确定不存在未处理的AC系数,则AC系数DPCM单元212结束DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图20。In this manner, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 repeatedly performs the processing of steps S133 to S135 as long as it is determined in step S133 that there is an unprocessed AC coefficient. If it is determined in step S133 that there is no unprocessed AC coefficient, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 212 ends the DPCM processing and returns the processing to FIG. 20 .

如上所述,确定DC系数与AC系数之中的位于开始的AC系数之差,并且替代DC系数,该差值被发送给图像解码装置。因此,图像编码装置10可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。As described above, the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient located at the beginning among the AC coefficients is determined and sent to the image decoding device instead of the DC coefficient. Therefore, the image encoding device 10 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

接下来,将描述根据本公开内容的实施例的图像解码装置的示例配置。Next, an example configuration of an image decoding device according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described.

<2-8.图像解码装置><2-8. Image Decoding Device>

图22是表示根据本公开内容的实施例的图像解码装置300的示例配置的方框图。图22中示出的图像解码装置300是应用本技术的图像处理装置,并且该图像处理装置被配置为对由图像编码装置10产生的编码数据进行解码。参照图22,图像解码装置300包括累积缓冲器311、无损解码单元312、去量化/逆正交变换单元313、加法器单元315、去块滤波器316、重新排列缓冲器317、D/A(数模)转换单元318、帧存储器319、选择器320和321、帧内预测单元330和运动补偿单元340。FIG22 is a block diagram showing an example configuration of an image decoding device 300 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The image decoding device 300 shown in FIG22 is an image processing device to which the present technology is applied, and is configured to decode the encoded data generated by the image encoding device 10. Referring to FIG22 , the image decoding device 300 includes an accumulation buffer 311, a lossless decoding unit 312, a dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313, an adder unit 315, a deblocking filter 316, a rearrangement buffer 317, a D/A (digital-to-analog) conversion unit 318, a frame memory 319, selectors 320 and 321, an intra-frame prediction unit 330, and a motion compensation unit 340.

累积缓冲器311使用存储介质临时地累积经由传输路径输入的编码流。The accumulation buffer 311 temporarily accumulates the encoded stream input via the transmission path using a storage medium.

无损解码单元312根据用于编码的编码方案对从累积缓冲器311输入的编码流进行解码。无损解码单元312还对编码流的头部区域中多路复用的信息进行解码。编码流的头部区域中多路复用的信息可包括例如用于产生上述缩放列表的信息以及块头部中所包含的关于帧内预测的信息和关于帧间预测的信息。无损解码单元312将解码的量化的数据和用于产生缩放列表的信息输出到去量化/逆正交变换单元313。无损解码单元312还将关于帧内预测的信息输出到帧内预测单元330。无损解码单元312还将关于帧间预测的信息输出到运动补偿单元340。The lossless decoding unit 312 decodes the encoded stream input from the accumulation buffer 311 according to the encoding scheme used for encoding. The lossless decoding unit 312 also decodes the information multiplexed in the header area of the encoded stream. The information multiplexed in the header area of the encoded stream may include, for example, information for generating the above-mentioned scaling list and information about intra-frame prediction and information about inter-frame prediction contained in the block header. The lossless decoding unit 312 outputs the decoded quantized data and the information for generating the scaling list to the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313. The lossless decoding unit 312 also outputs information about intra-frame prediction to the intra-frame prediction unit 330. The lossless decoding unit 312 also outputs information about inter-frame prediction to the motion compensation unit 340.

去量化/逆正交变换单元313对从无损解码单元312输入的量化的数据执行去量化和逆正交变换以产生预测误差数据。其后,去量化/逆正交变换单元313将产生的预测误差数据输出到加法器单元315。The dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 performs dequantization and inverse orthogonal transform on the quantized data input from the lossless decoding unit 312 to generate prediction error data. Thereafter, the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 outputs the generated prediction error data to the adder unit 315.

加法器单元315将从去量化/逆正交变换单元313输入的预测误差数据和从选择器321输入的预测图像数据相加在一起以产生解码图像数据。其后,加法器单元315将产生的解码图像数据输出到去块滤波器316和帧存储器319。The adder unit 315 adds together the prediction error data input from the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 and the predicted image data input from the selector 321 to generate decoded image data. Thereafter, the adder unit 315 outputs the generated decoded image data to the deblocking filter 316 and the frame memory 319.

去块滤波器316对从加法器单元315输入的解码图像数据进行滤波以去除块伪像,并且将滤波后的解码图像数据输出到重新排列缓冲器317和帧存储器319。The deblocking filter 316 filters the decoded image data input from the adder unit 315 to remove block artifacts, and outputs the filtered decoded image data to the rearrangement buffer 317 and the frame memory 319 .

重新排列缓冲器317重新排列从去块滤波器316输入的图像以产生时间系列图像数据序列。其后,重新排列缓冲器317将产生的图像数据输出到D/A转换单元318。The rearrangement buffer 317 rearranges the image input from the deblocking filter 316 to generate a time series image data sequence. Thereafter, the rearrangement buffer 317 outputs the generated image data to the D/A conversion unit 318.

D/A转换单元318将从重新排列缓冲器317输入的数字形式的图像数据转换成模拟形式的图像信号。其后,D/A转换单元318将模拟图像信号输出到例如连接到图像解码装置300的显示器(未示出)以显示图像。The D/A conversion unit 318 converts the digital image data input from the rearrangement buffer 317 into an analog image signal. Thereafter, the D/A conversion unit 318 outputs the analog image signal to, for example, a display (not shown) connected to the image decoding device 300 to display the image.

帧存储器319使用存储介质存储从加法器单元31输入的待滤波的解码图像数据和从去块滤波器316输入的滤波后的解码图像数据。The frame memory 319 stores the decoded image data to be filtered input from the adder unit 31 and the decoded image data after filtering input from the deblocking filter 316 using a storage medium.

选择器320根据由无损解码单元312获取的模式信息,针对图像中的每个块在帧内预测单元330和运动补偿单元340之间切换从帧存储器319提供的图像数据将要被输出到的目的地。例如,如果指定了帧内预测模式,则选择器320将从帧存储器319提供的待滤波的解码图像数据输出到帧内预测单元330作为参考图像数据。另外,如果指定了帧间预测模式,则选择器320将从帧存储器319提供的滤波的解码图像数据输出到运动补偿单元340作为参考图像数据。The selector 320 switches the destination to which the image data supplied from the frame memory 319 is to be output between the intra prediction unit 330 and the motion compensation unit 340 for each block in the image, based on the mode information acquired by the lossless decoding unit 312. For example, if the intra prediction mode is specified, the selector 320 outputs the decoded image data to be filtered supplied from the frame memory 319 to the intra prediction unit 330 as reference image data. Alternatively, if the inter prediction mode is specified, the selector 320 outputs the filtered decoded image data supplied from the frame memory 319 to the motion compensation unit 340 as reference image data.

选择器321根据由无损解码单元312获取的模式信息,针对图像中的每个块在帧内预测单元330和运动补偿单元340之间切换将要从其输出将要被提供给加法器单元315的预测图像数据的源。例如,如果指定了帧内预测模式,则选择器321将从帧内预测单元330输出的预测图像数据提供给加法器单元315。如果指定了帧间预测模式,则选择器321将从运动补偿单元340输出的预测图像数据提供给加法器单元315。The selector 321 switches the source from which the predicted image data to be supplied to the adder unit 315 is output between the intra prediction unit 330 and the motion compensation unit 340 for each block in the image, according to the mode information acquired by the lossless decoding unit 312. For example, if the intra prediction mode is specified, the selector 321 supplies the predicted image data output from the intra prediction unit 330 to the adder unit 315. If the inter prediction mode is specified, the selector 321 supplies the predicted image data output from the motion compensation unit 340 to the adder unit 315.

帧内预测单元330基于从无损解码单元312输入的关于帧内预测的信息和从帧存储器319提供的参考图像数据执行像素值的屏幕内预测,并且产生预测图像数据。其后,帧内预测单元330将产生的预测图像数据输出到选择器321。The intra prediction unit 330 performs intra-screen prediction of pixel values based on the information on intra prediction input from the lossless decoding unit 312 and the reference image data provided from the frame memory 319, and generates predicted image data. Thereafter, the intra prediction unit 330 outputs the generated predicted image data to the selector 321.

运动补偿单元340基于从无损解码单元312输入的关于帧间预测的信息和从帧存储器319提供的参考图像数据执行运动补偿处理,并且产生预测图像数据。其后,运动补偿单元340将产生的预测图像数据输出到选择器321。The motion compensation unit 340 performs motion compensation processing based on the information on inter prediction input from the lossless decoding unit 312 and the reference image data supplied from the frame memory 319 and generates predicted image data. Thereafter, the motion compensation unit 340 outputs the generated predicted image data to the selector 321.

<2-9.去量化/逆正交变换单元的示例配置><2-9. Example Configuration of Dequantization/Inverse Orthogonal Transform Unit>

图23是表示图22中示出的图像解码装置300的去量化/逆正交变换单元313的主要配置的例子的方框图。参照图23,去量化/逆正交变换单元313包括矩阵产生单元410、选择单元430、去量化单元440和逆正交变换单元450。23 is a block diagram showing an example of the main configuration of the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 of the image decoding device 300 shown in FIG 22. Referring to FIG 23, the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 includes a matrix generation unit 410, a selection unit 430, a dequantization unit 440, and an inverse orthogonal transform unit 450.

(1)矩阵产生单元(1) Matrix generation unit

矩阵产生单元410对从比特流提取并且由无损解码单元312提供的编码缩放列表数据进行解码,并且产生缩放列表。矩阵产生单元410将产生的缩放列表提供给去量化单元440。The matrix generation unit 410 decodes the encoded scaling list data extracted from the bitstream and provided by the lossless decoding unit 312 and generates a scaling list. The matrix generation unit 410 provides the generated scaling list to the dequantization unit 440.

(2)选择单元(2) Select unit

选择单元430从具有不同尺寸的多个变换单位之中选择用于待解码的图像数据的逆正交变换的变换单位(TU)。可由选择单元430选择的变换单位的可能的尺寸的例子包括用于H.264/AVC的4×4和8×8,并且包括用于HEVC的4×4、8×8、16×16和32×32。选择单元430可根据例如编码流的头部中所包含的LCU、SCU和split_flag选择变换单位。其后,选择单元430将指定所选择的变换单位的尺寸的信息输出到去量化单元440和逆正交变换单元450。The selection unit 430 selects a transform unit (TU) for inverse orthogonal transform of the image data to be decoded from a plurality of transform units having different sizes. Examples of possible sizes of the transform unit that can be selected by the selection unit 430 include 4×4 and 8×8 for H.264/AVC, and 4×4, 8×8, 16×16, and 32×32 for HEVC. The selection unit 430 can select the transform unit based on, for example, the LCU, SCU, and split_flag included in the header of the coded stream. Thereafter, the selection unit 430 outputs information specifying the size of the selected transform unit to the dequantization unit 440 and the inverse orthogonal transform unit 450.

(3)去量化单元(3) Dequantization unit

去量化单元440通过使用由选择单元430选择的变换单位的缩放列表,对当对图像进行编码时量化的变换系数数据进行去量化。其后,去量化单元440将去量化的变换系数数据输出到逆正交变换单元450。The dequantization unit 440 dequantizes the transform coefficient data quantized when encoding the image by using the scaling list of the transform unit selected by the selection unit 430. Thereafter, the dequantization unit 440 outputs the dequantized transform coefficient data to the inverse orthogonal transform unit 450.

(4)逆正交变换单元(4) Inverse orthogonal transformation unit

逆正交变换单元450根据用于编码的正交变换方案,以选择的变换单位为单位对由去量化单元440去量化的变换系数数据执行逆正交变换以产生预测误差数据。其后,逆正交变换单元450将产生的预测误差数据输出到加法器单元315。The inverse orthogonal transform unit 450 performs an inverse orthogonal transform on the transform coefficient data dequantized by the dequantization unit 440 in units of the selected transform unit according to the orthogonal transform scheme used for encoding to generate prediction error data. Thereafter, the inverse orthogonal transform unit 450 outputs the generated prediction error data to the adder unit 315.

<2-10.矩阵产生单元的详细示例配置><2-10. Detailed Example Configuration of Matrix Generation Unit>

图24是表示图23中示出的矩阵产生单元410的详细配置的例子的方框图。参照图24,矩阵产生单元410包括参数分析单元531、预测单元532、熵解码单元533、缩放列表恢复单元534、输出单元535和存储单元536。24 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a detailed configuration of the matrix generation unit 410 shown in FIG 23. Referring to FIG 24, the matrix generation unit 410 includes a parameter analysis unit 531, a prediction unit 532, an entropy decoding unit 533, a scaling list restoration unit 534, an output unit 535, and a storage unit 536.

(1)参数分析单元(1) Parameter analysis unit

参数分析单元531分析从无损解码单元312提供的关于缩放列表的各种标记和参数。另外,根据分析结果,参数分析单元531将从无损解码单元312提供的各种信息(诸如,差矩阵的编码数据)提供给预测单元532或熵解码单元533。The parameter analysis unit 531 analyzes various flags and parameters regarding the scaling list provided from the lossless decoding unit 312. In addition, based on the analysis result, the parameter analysis unit 531 provides various information provided from the lossless decoding unit 312 (such as encoded data of the difference matrix) to the prediction unit 532 or the entropy decoding unit 533.

例如,如果pred_mode等于0,则参数分析单元531确定当前模式是复制模式,并且将pred_matrix_id_delta提供给复制单元541。另外,例如,如果pred_mode等于1,则参数分析单元531确定当前模式是全扫描模式(正常模式),并且将pred_matrix_id_delta和pred_size_id_delta提供给预测矩阵产生单元542。For example, if pred_mode is equal to 0, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines that the current mode is the copy mode and provides pred_matrix_id_delta to the copy unit 541. In addition, for example, if pred_mode is equal to 1, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines that the current mode is the full scan mode (normal mode) and provides pred_matrix_id_delta and pred_size_id_delta to the prediction matrix generation unit 542.

另外,例如,如果residual_flag为真,则参数分析单元531将从无损解码单元312提供的缩放列表的编码数据(指数Golomb码)提供给熵解码单元533的exp-G单元551。参数分析单元531还将residual_symmetry_flag提供给exp-G单元551。In addition, for example, if residual_flag is true, the parameter analysis unit 531 supplies the encoded data (exponential Golomb code) of the scaling list supplied from the lossless decoding unit 312 to the exp-G unit 551 of the entropy decoding unit 533. The parameter analysis unit 531 also supplies residual_symmetry_flag to the exp-G unit 551.

另外,参数分析单元531将residual_down_sampling_flag提供给缩放列表恢复单元534的差矩阵尺寸变换单元562。In addition, the parameter analyzing unit 531 supplies residual_down_sampling_flag to the difference matrix size transforming unit 562 of the scaling list restoring unit 534 .

(2)预测单元(2) Prediction unit

预测单元532根据参数分析单元531的控制产生预测矩阵。如图24中所示,预测单元532包括复制单元541和预测矩阵产生单元542。The prediction unit 532 generates a prediction matrix according to the control of the parameter analysis unit 531. As shown in FIG24, the prediction unit 532 includes a copy unit 541 and a prediction matrix generation unit 542.

在复制模式下,复制单元541复制以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用复制的缩放列表作为预测矩阵。更具体地,复制单元541从存储单元536读取与pred_matrix_id_delta对应并且具有与用于当前区域的缩放列表相同的尺寸的以前发送的缩放列表,使用读取的缩放列表作为预测图像,并且将预测图像提供给输出单元535。In the copy mode, the copy unit 541 copies the previously transmitted scaling list and uses the copied scaling list as the prediction matrix. More specifically, the copy unit 541 reads the previously transmitted scaling list corresponding to pred_matrix_id_delta and having the same size as the scaling list for the current region from the storage unit 536, uses the read scaling list as the predicted image, and provides the predicted image to the output unit 535.

在正常模式下,预测矩阵产生单元542使用以前发送的缩放列表产生(或预测)预测矩阵。更具体地,预测矩阵产生单元542从存储单元536读取与pred_matrix_id_delta和pred_size_id_delta对应的以前发送的缩放列表,并且使用读取的缩放列表产生预测矩阵。换句话说,预测矩阵产生单元542产生与由图像编码装置10的预测矩阵产生单元172(图16)产生的预测矩阵类似的预测矩阵。预测矩阵产生单元542将产生的预测矩阵提供给缩放列表恢复单元534的预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561。In normal mode, the prediction matrix generation unit 542 generates (or predicts) a prediction matrix using a previously transmitted scaling list. More specifically, the prediction matrix generation unit 542 reads the previously transmitted scaling list corresponding to pred_matrix_id_delta and pred_size_id_delta from the storage unit 536 and generates a prediction matrix using the read scaling list. In other words, the prediction matrix generation unit 542 generates a prediction matrix similar to the prediction matrix generated by the prediction matrix generation unit 172 ( FIG. 16 ) of the image encoding device 10. The prediction matrix generation unit 542 provides the generated prediction matrix to the prediction matrix size conversion unit 561 of the scaling list restoration unit 534.

(3)熵解码单元(3) Entropy decoding unit

熵解码单元533从由参数分析单元531提供的指数Golomb码恢复差矩阵。如图24中所示,熵解码单元533包括exp-G单元551、逆DPCM单元552和逆交叠确定单元553。The entropy decoding unit 533 restores the difference matrix from the exponential Golomb code supplied from the parameter analyzing unit 531. As shown in FIG.

exp-G单元551对有符号或无符号指数Golomb码进行解码(在下文中也被称为指数Golomb解码)以恢复DPCM数据。exp-G单元551将恢复的DPCM数据与residual_symmetry_flag一起提供给逆DPCM单元552。The exp-G unit 551 decodes the signed or unsigned exponential Golomb code (hereinafter also referred to as exponential Golomb decoding) to restore DPCM data and provides the restored DPCM data to the inverse DPCM unit 552 together with residual_symmetry_flag.

逆DPCM单元552对已从其去除了交叠部分的数据执行DPCM解码以从DPCM数据产生残差数据。逆DPCM单元552将产生的残差数据与residual_symmetry_flag一起提供给逆交叠确定单元553。The inverse DPCM unit 552 performs DPCM decoding on the data from which the overlapping portion has been removed to generate residual data from the DPCM data. The inverse DPCM unit 552 supplies the generated residual data to the inverse overlap determination unit 553 together with residual_symmetry_flag.

如果residual_symmetry_flag为真,也就是说,如果残差数据是已从其去除了交叠对称部分的数据(矩阵元素)的135度对称矩阵的剩余部分,则逆交叠确定单元553恢复对称部分的数据。换句话说,恢复135度对称矩阵的差矩阵。注意,如果residual_symmetry_flag不为真,也就是说,如果残差数据代表不是135度对称矩阵的矩阵,则逆交叠确定单元553使用残差数据作为差矩阵,而不恢复对称部分的数据。逆交叠确定单元553将以上述方式恢复的差矩阵提供给缩放列表恢复单元534(差矩阵尺寸变换单元562)。If residual_symmetry_flag is true, that is, if the residual data is the remainder of a 135-degree symmetric matrix from which the data (matrix elements) of the overlapping symmetric portion have been removed, the inverse overlap determination unit 553 restores the data of the symmetric portion. In other words, the difference matrix of the 135-degree symmetric matrix is restored. Note that if residual_symmetry_flag is not true, that is, if the residual data represents a matrix that is not a 135-degree symmetric matrix, the inverse overlap determination unit 553 uses the residual data as the difference matrix without restoring the data of the symmetric portion. The inverse overlap determination unit 553 provides the difference matrix restored in the above manner to the scaling list restoration unit 534 (difference matrix size conversion unit 562).

(4)缩放列表恢复单元(4) Zoom list recovery unit

缩放列表恢复单元534恢复缩放列表。如图24中所示,缩放列表恢复单元534包括预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561、差矩阵尺寸变换单元562、去量化单元563和计算单元564。The scaling list restoration unit 534 restores the scaling list. As shown in FIG24 , the scaling list restoration unit 534 includes a prediction matrix size transform unit 561 , a difference matrix size transform unit 562 , a dequantization unit 563 , and a calculation unit 564 .

如果从预测单元532(预测矩阵产生单元542)提供的预测矩阵的尺寸不同于待恢复的用于当前区域的缩放列表的尺寸,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561转换预测矩阵的尺寸。If the size of the prediction matrix provided from the prediction unit 532 (prediction matrix generation unit 542) is different from the size of the scaling list for the current region to be restored, the prediction matrix size transformation unit 561 converts the size of the prediction matrix.

例如,如果预测矩阵的尺寸大于缩放列表的尺寸,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561对预测矩阵进行下转换。另外,例如,如果预测矩阵的尺寸小于缩放列表的尺寸,则预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561对预测矩阵进行上转换。与用于图像编码装置10的预测矩阵尺寸变换单元181(图16)的方法相同的方法被选择为转换方法。For example, if the size of the prediction matrix is larger than the size of the scaling list, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 561 down-converts the prediction matrix. Alternatively, if the size of the prediction matrix is smaller than the size of the scaling list, the prediction matrix size conversion unit 561 up-converts the prediction matrix. The same method as that used by the prediction matrix size conversion unit 181 ( FIG. 16 ) of the image encoding device 10 is selected as the conversion method.

预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561将其尺寸已与缩放列表的尺寸匹配的预测矩阵提供给计算单元564。The prediction matrix size conversion unit 561 supplies the prediction matrix whose size has been matched with the size of the scaling list to the calculation unit 564 .

如果residual_down_sampling_flag为真,也就是说,如果发送的差矩阵的尺寸小于待量化的当前区域的尺寸,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元562对差矩阵进行上转换,以将差矩阵的尺寸增加至与将要被去量化的当前区域对应的尺寸。可使用用于上转换的任何方法。例如,可使用与由图像编码装置10的差矩阵尺寸变换单元163(图16)执行的下转换方法对应的方法。If residual_down_sampling_flag is true, that is, if the size of the transmitted difference matrix is smaller than the size of the current region to be quantized, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 up-converts the difference matrix to increase the size of the difference matrix to a size corresponding to the current region to be dequantized. Any method for up-conversion can be used. For example, a method corresponding to the down-conversion method performed by the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 ( FIG. 16 ) of the image encoding device 10 can be used.

例如,如果差矩阵尺寸变换单元163已对差矩阵进行了下采样,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元562可对差矩阵进行上采样。替代地,如果差矩阵尺寸变换单元163已对差矩阵进行了子采样,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元562可对差矩阵执行逆子采样。For example, if the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 has downsampled the difference matrix, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 may upsample the difference matrix. Alternatively, if the difference matrix size conversion unit 163 has subsampled the difference matrix, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 may perform inverse subsampling on the difference matrix.

例如,差矩阵尺寸变换单元562可执行如图25中所示的最近邻居内插处理(最近邻居),而非通常的线性内插。最近邻居内插处理可以减少存储容量。For example, the difference matrix size transforming unit 562 may perform a nearest neighbor interpolation process (Nearest Neighbor) as shown in FIG25 instead of the usual linear interpolation. The nearest neighbor interpolation process can reduce the storage capacity.

因此,即使未发送具有大尺寸的缩放列表,也不需要为了从具有小尺寸的缩放列表进行上采样而存储在上采样之后获得的数据。另外,当在上采样期间的计算中涉及的数据被存储时,不需要中间缓冲器等。Therefore, even if a large-sized scaling list is not transmitted, there is no need to store data obtained after upsampling for upsampling from a small-sized scaling list. In addition, when data involved in calculations during upsampling is stored, an intermediate buffer or the like is not required.

注意,如果residual_down_sampling_flag不为真,也就是说,如果以与当用于量化处理时的尺寸相同的尺寸发送差矩阵时,差矩阵尺寸变换单元562省略差矩阵的上转换(或可通过因数1对差矩阵进行上转换)。Note that if residual_down_sampling_flag is not true, that is, if the difference matrix is sent with the same size as when used for quantization processing, the difference matrix size transformation unit 562 omits up-conversion of the difference matrix (or may up-convert the difference matrix by a factor of 1).

差矩阵尺寸变换单元562根据需要将以上述方式上转换的差矩阵提供给去量化单元563。The difference matrix size transforming unit 562 supplies the difference matrix up-converted in the above-described manner to the dequantizing unit 563 as needed.

去量化单元563使用与由图像编码装置10的量化单元183(图16)执行的量化的方法对应的方法对提供的差矩阵(量化的数据)进行去量化,并且将去量化的差矩阵提供给计算单元564。注意,如果量化单元183被省略,也就是说,如果从差矩阵尺寸变换单元562提供的差矩阵不是量化的数据,则去量化单元563可以被省略。The dequantization unit 563 dequantizes the supplied difference matrix (quantized data) using a method corresponding to the method of quantization performed by the quantization unit 183 ( FIG. 16 ) of the image encoding device 10, and supplies the dequantized difference matrix to the calculation unit 564. Note that if the quantization unit 183 is omitted, that is, if the difference matrix supplied from the difference matrix size transform unit 562 is not quantized data, the dequantization unit 563 may be omitted.

计算单元564将从预测矩阵尺寸变换单元561提供的预测矩阵和从去量化单元563提供的差矩阵相加在一起,并且恢复用于当前区域的缩放列表。计算单元564将恢复的缩放列表提供给输出单元535和存储单元536。The calculation unit 564 adds together the prediction matrix provided from the prediction matrix size conversion unit 561 and the difference matrix provided from the dequantization unit 563 and restores the scaling list for the current region. The calculation unit 564 provides the restored scaling list to the output unit 535 and the storage unit 536.

(5)输出单元(5) Output unit

输出单元535将提供的信息输出到在矩阵产生单元410外面的装置。例如,在复制模式下,输出单元535将从复制单元541提供的预测矩阵提供给去量化单元440作为用于当前区域的缩放列表。另外,例如,在正常模式下,输出单元535将从缩放列表恢复单元534(计算单元564)提供的用于当前区域的缩放列表提供给去量化单元440。The output unit 535 outputs the provided information to a device outside the matrix generation unit 410. For example, in the copy mode, the output unit 535 provides the prediction matrix provided from the copy unit 541 to the dequantization unit 440 as a scaling list for the current region. In addition, for example, in the normal mode, the output unit 535 provides the scaling list for the current region provided from the scaling list restoration unit 534 (calculation unit 564) to the dequantization unit 440.

(6)存储单元(6) Storage unit

存储单元536存储从缩放列表恢复单元534(计算单元564)提供的缩放列表以及缩放列表的尺寸和列表ID。存储在存储单元536中的关于缩放列表的信息被用于产生在稍后时间处理的其它正交变换单位的预测矩阵。换句话说,存储单元536将存储的关于缩放列表的信息提供给预测单元532,作为关于以前发送的缩放列表的信息。The storage unit 536 stores the scaling list provided from the scaling list restoration unit 534 (calculation unit 564), along with the size and list ID of the scaling list. The information about the scaling list stored in the storage unit 536 is used to generate a prediction matrix for another orthogonal transform unit processed later. In other words, the storage unit 536 provides the stored information about the scaling list to the prediction unit 532 as information about the previously transmitted scaling list.

<2-11.逆DPCM单元的详细示例配置><2-11. Detailed Example Configuration of Inverse DPCM Unit>

图26是表示图24中示出的逆DPCM单元552的详细配置的例子的方框图。参照图26,逆DPCM单元552包括初始设置单元571、DPCM解码单元572和DC系数提取单元573。26 is a block diagram showing an example of a detailed configuration of the inverse DPCM unit 552 shown in FIG 24. Referring to FIG 26 , the inverse DPCM unit 552 includes an initial setting unit 571, a DPCM decoding unit 572, and a DC coefficient extraction unit 573.

初始设置单元571获取sizeID和MatrixID,并且将各种变量设置为初始值。初始设置单元571将获取的和设置的信息提供给DPCM解码单元572。The initial setting unit 571 acquires sizeID and MatrixID, and sets various variables to initial values. The initial setting unit 571 supplies the acquired and set information to the DPCM decoding unit 572.

DPCM解码单元572使用从初始设置单元571提供的初始设置等,从DC系数与AC系数的差值(scaling_list_delta_coef)确定各系数(DC系数和AC系数)。DPCM解码单元572将确定的系数提供给DC系数提取单元573(ScalingList[i])。The DPCM decoding unit 572 determines each coefficient (DC coefficient and AC coefficient) from the difference (scaling_list_delta_coef) between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient using the initial setting etc. supplied from the initial setting unit 571. The DPCM decoding unit 572 supplies the determined coefficients to the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 (ScalingList[i]).

DC系数提取单元573从由DPCM解码单元572提供的系数(ScalingList[i])之中提取DC系数。DC系数位于AC系数的开始。也就是说,从DPCM解码单元572提供的系数之中的初始系数(ScalingList[0])是DC系数。DC系数提取单元573提取位于开始的系数作为DC系数,并且将提取的系数输出到逆交叠确定单元553(DC_coef)。DC系数提取单元573将其它系数(ScalingList[i](i>0))输出到逆交叠确定单元553作为AC系数。The DC coefficient extraction unit 573 extracts the DC coefficient from the coefficients (ScalingList[i]) provided by the DPCM decoding unit 572. The DC coefficient is located at the beginning of the AC coefficients. In other words, the initial coefficient (ScalingList[0]) among the coefficients provided by the DPCM decoding unit 572 is the DC coefficient. The DC coefficient extraction unit 573 extracts the coefficient at the beginning as the DC coefficient and outputs the extracted coefficient to the inverse overlap determination unit 553 (DC_coef). The DC coefficient extraction unit 573 outputs the remaining coefficients (ScalingList[i] (i>0)) to the inverse overlap determination unit 553 as AC coefficients.

因此,逆DPCM单元552可以执行正确的DPCM解码,并且可以获得DC系数和AC系数。也就是说,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the inverse DPCM unit 552 can perform correct DPCM decoding and can obtain the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient. That is, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<2-12.量化矩阵解码处理的流程><2-12. Flow of Quantization Matrix Decoding Processing>

将参照图27中示出的流程图描述由具有上述配置的矩阵产生单元410执行的量化矩阵解码处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the quantization matrix decoding process performed by the matrix generation unit 410 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 27 .

当量化矩阵解码处理开始时,在步骤S301中,参数分析单元531读取区域0至3的量化的值(Qscale0至Qscale3)。When the quantization matrix decoding process starts, in step S301 , the parameter analysis unit 531 reads the quantized values ( Qscale0 to Qscale3 ) of regions 0 to 3 .

在步骤S302中,参数分析单元531读取pred_mode。在步骤S303中,参数分析单元531确定pred_mode是否等于0。如果确定pred_mode等于0,则参数分析单元531确定当前模式是复制模式,并且使处理前进至步骤S304。In step S302, the parameter analysis unit 531 reads pred_mode. In step S303, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines whether pred_mode is equal to 0. If it is determined that pred_mode is equal to 0, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines that the current mode is the copy mode, and advances the process to step S304.

在步骤S304中,参数分析单元531读取pred_matrix_id_delta。在步骤S305中,复制单元541复制已被发送的缩放列表,并且使用复制的缩放列表作为预测矩阵。在复制模式下,预测矩阵被输出为用于当前区域的缩放列表。当步骤S305的处理完成时,复制单元541结束量化矩阵解码处理。In step S304, the parameter analysis unit 531 reads pred_matrix_id_delta. In step S305, the copy unit 541 copies the transmitted scaling list and uses the copied scaling list as the prediction matrix. In copy mode, the prediction matrix is output as the scaling list for the current region. When the processing of step S305 is completed, the copy unit 541 ends the quantization matrix decoding process.

另外,如果在步骤S303中确定pred_mode不等于0,则参数分析单元531确定当前模式是全扫描模式(正常模式),并且使处理前进至步骤S306。In addition, if it is determined in step S303 that pred_mode is not equal to 0, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines that the current mode is the full scan mode (normal mode), and advances the process to step S306.

在步骤S306中,参数分析单元531读取pred_matrix_id_delta、pred_size_id_delta和residual_flag。在步骤S307中,预测矩阵产生单元542从已发送的缩放列表产生预测矩阵。In step S306, the parameter analysis unit 531 reads pred_matrix_id_delta, pred_size_id_delta, and residual_flag. In step S307, the prediction matrix generation unit 542 generates a prediction matrix from the transmitted scaling list.

在步骤S308中,参数分析单元531确定residual_flag是否为真。如果确定residual_flag不为真,则不存在残差矩阵,并且在步骤S307中产生的预测矩阵被输出为用于当前区域的缩放列表。因此,在这种情况下,参数分析单元531结束量化矩阵解码处理。In step S308, the parameter analysis unit 531 determines whether residual_flag is true. If it is determined that residual_flag is not true, there is no residual matrix, and the prediction matrix generated in step S307 is output as the scaling list for the current region. Therefore, in this case, the parameter analysis unit 531 ends the quantization matrix decoding process.

另外,如果在步骤S308中确定residual_flag为真,则参数分析单元531使处理前进至步骤S309。In addition, if it is determined in step S308 that residual_flag is true, the parameter analysis unit 531 advances the process to step S309 .

在步骤S309中,参数分析单元531读取residual_down_sampling_flag和residual_symmetry_flag。In step S309 , the parameter analysis unit 531 reads residual_down_sampling_flag and residual_symmetry_flag.

在步骤S310中,exp-G单元551和逆DPCM单元552对残差矩阵的指数Golomb码进行解码,并且产生残差数据。In step S310 , the exp-G unit 551 and the inverse DPCM unit 552 decode the exponential Golomb code of the residual matrix and generate residual data.

在步骤S311中,逆交叠确定单元553确定residual_symmetry_flag是否为真。如果确定residual_symmetry_flag为真,则逆交叠确定单元553使处理前进至步骤S312,并且恢复残差数据的去除的交叠部分(或执行逆对称处理)。当以上述方式产生作为135度对称矩阵的差矩阵时,逆交叠确定单元553使处理前进至步骤S313。In step S311, the inverse overlap determination unit 553 determines whether residual_symmetry_flag is true. If it is determined that residual_symmetry_flag is true, the inverse overlap determination unit 553 advances the process to step S312 and restores the removed overlapping portion of the residual data (or performs inverse symmetry processing). When the difference matrix is generated as a 135-degree symmetric matrix in the above manner, the inverse overlap determination unit 553 advances the process to step S313.

另外,如果在步骤S311中确定residual_symmetry_flag不为真(或如果残差数据是这样的差矩阵,即该差矩阵不是135度对称矩阵),则逆交叠确定单元553使处理前进至步骤S313,同时跳过步骤S312的处理(或不执行逆对称处理)。In addition, if it is determined in step S311 that residual_symmetry_flag is not true (or if the residual data is such a difference matrix that the difference matrix is not a 135-degree symmetric matrix), the inverse overlap determination unit 553 advances the processing to step S313 while skipping the processing of step S312 (or not performing inverse symmetry processing).

在步骤S313中,差矩阵尺寸变换单元562确定residual_down_sampling_flag是否为真。如果确定residual_down_sampling_flag为真,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元562使处理前进至步骤S314,并且将差矩阵上转换为与将要被去量化的当前区域对应的尺寸。在差矩阵被上转换之后,差矩阵尺寸变换单元562使处理前进至步骤S315。In step S313, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 determines whether residual_down_sampling_flag is true. If residual_down_sampling_flag is true, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 advances the process to step S314 and up-converts the difference matrix to a size corresponding to the current region to be dequantized. After the difference matrix is up-converted, the difference matrix size conversion unit 562 advances the process to step S315.

另外,如果在步骤S313中确定residual_down_sampling_flag不为真,则差矩阵尺寸变换单元562使处理前进至步骤S315,同时跳过步骤S314的处理(或不对差矩阵进行上转换)。In addition, if it is determined in step S313 that residual_down_sampling_flag is not true, the difference matrix size transform unit 562 advances the process to step S315 while skipping the process of step S314 (or not up-converting the difference matrix).

在步骤S315中,计算单元564将差矩阵与预测矩阵相加以产生用于当前区域的缩放列表。当步骤S315的处理完成时,量化矩阵解码处理结束。In step S315, the calculation unit 564 adds the difference matrix and the prediction matrix to generate a scaling list for the current region. When the process of step S315 is completed, the quantization matrix decoding process ends.

<2-13.残差信号解码处理的流程><2-13. Flow of Residual Signal Decoding Processing>

接下来,将参照图28中示出的流程图描述在图27中的步骤S310中执行的残差信号解码处理的流程的例子。Next, an example of the flow of the residual signal decoding process performed in step S310 in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 28 .

当残差信号解码处理开始时,在步骤S331中,exp-G单元551对提供的指数Golomb码进行解码。When the residual signal decoding process starts, in step S331 , the exp-G unit 551 decodes the supplied exponential Golomb code.

在步骤S332中,逆DPCM单元552对由exp-G单元551通过解码获得的DPCM数据执行逆DPCM处理。In step S332 , the inverse DPCM unit 552 performs inverse DPCM processing on the DPCM data obtained by decoding by the exp-G unit 551 .

当逆DPCM处理完成时,逆DPCM单元552结束残差信号解码处理,并且使处理返回到图27。When the inverse DPCM process is completed, the inverse DPCM unit 552 ends the residual signal decoding process and returns the process to FIG. 27 .

<2-14.逆DPCM处理的流程><2-14. Flow of Inverse DPCM Processing>

接下来,将参照图29中示出的流程图描述在图28中的步骤S332中执行的逆DPCM处理的流程的例子。Next, an example of the flow of the inverse DPCM process performed in step S332 in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 29 .

当逆DPCM处理开始时,在步骤S351中,初始设置单元571获取sizeID和MatrixID。When the inverse DPCM process starts, in step S351 , the initial setting unit 571 acquires sizeID and MatrixID.

在步骤S352中,初始设置单元571如下设置coefNum。In step S352 , the initial setting unit 571 sets coefNum as follows.

coefNum=min((1<<(4+(sizeID<<1))),65)coefNum=min((1<<(4+(sizeID<<1))),65)

在步骤S353中,初始设置单元571如下设置变量i和变量nextcoef。In step S353 , the initial setting unit 571 sets the variable i and the variable nextcoef as follows.

i=0i=0

nextcoef=8nextcoef=8

在步骤S354中,DPCM解码单元572确定是否变量i<coefNum。如果变量i小于coefNum,则初始设置单元571使处理前进至步骤S355。In step S354, the DPCM decoding unit 572 determines whether the variable i < coefNum. If the variable i is smaller than coefNum, the initial setting unit 571 advances the process to step S355.

在步骤S355中,DPCM解码单元572读取系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)。In step S355 , the DPCM decoding unit 572 reads the DPCM data of the coefficient (scaling_list_delta_coef).

在步骤S356中,DPCM解码单元572使用读取的DPCM数据如下地确定nextcoef,并且还确定scalingList[i]。In step S356 , the DPCM decoding unit 572 determines nextcoef as follows using the read DPCM data, and also determines scalingList[i].

nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256

scalingList[i]=nextcoefscalingList[i] = nextcoef

在步骤S357中,DC系数提取单元573确定sizeID是否大于1以及变量i是否等于0(也就是说,位于开始的系数)。如果确定sizeID大于1并且变量i代表位于开始的系数,则DC系数提取单元573使处理前进至步骤S358,并且使用该系数作为DC系数(DC_coef=nextcoef)。当步骤S358的处理完成时,DC系数提取单元573使处理前进至步骤S360。In step S357, the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 determines whether sizeID is greater than 1 and whether the variable i is equal to 0 (that is, the coefficient at the beginning). If it is determined that sizeID is greater than 1 and the variable i represents the coefficient at the beginning, the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 advances the process to step S358 and uses the coefficient as the DC coefficient (DC_coef=nextcoef). When the process of step S358 is completed, the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 advances the process to step S360.

另外,如果在步骤S357中确定sizeID小于或等于1或者变量i不代表位于开始的系数,则DC系数提取单元573使处理前进至步骤S359,并且针对每个系数使变量i改变一,因为DC系数已被提取。(ScalingList[(i-(sizeID)>1)?1;0]=nextcoef)如果步骤S359的处理完成,则DC系数提取单元573使处理前进至步骤S360。If, in step S357, it is determined that sizeID is less than or equal to 1 or that the variable i does not represent the first coefficient, the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 advances the process to step S359 and changes the variable i by one for each coefficient since the DC coefficient has already been extracted (ScalingList[(i-(sizeID)>1)?1;0]=nextcoef). If the process of step S359 is complete, the DC coefficient extraction unit 573 advances the process to step S360.

在步骤S360中,DPCM解码单元572使变量i增加以将处理目标改变为随后的系数,然后使处理返回到步骤S354。In step S360 , the DPCM decoding unit 572 increments the variable i to change the processing target to the subsequent coefficient, and then returns the process to step S354 .

在步骤S354中,重复地执行步骤S354至S360的处理,直至确定变量i大于或等于coefNum。如果在步骤S354中确定变量i大于或等于coefNum,则DPCM解码单元572结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。In step S354, the processing of steps S354 to S360 is repeatedly performed until it is determined that the variable i is greater than or equal to coefNum. If it is determined in step S354 that the variable i is greater than or equal to coefNum, the DPCM decoding unit 572 ends the inverse DPCM processing and returns the processing to FIG.

因此,DC系数与位于AC系数的开始的AC系数之差可被正确地解码。因此,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient located at the beginning of the AC coefficients can be correctly decoded.Therefore, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<3.第三实施例><3. Third embodiment>

<3-1.语法:第二方法><3-1. Syntax: Second Method>

用于替代DC系数而发送DC系数与另一个系数之差的另一方法可以是例如:发送DC系数与8×8矩阵的(0,0)分量之差作为与8×8矩阵的DPCM数据不同的DPCM数据(第二方法)。例如,在8×8矩阵的DPCM发送之后,可发送DC系数与8×8矩阵的(0,0)分量之差。Another method for transmitting the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient instead of the DC coefficient may be, for example, transmitting the difference between the DC coefficient and the (0,0) component of the 8×8 matrix as DPCM data different from the DPCM data of the 8×8 matrix (second method). For example, after the DPCM data of the 8×8 matrix is transmitted, the difference between the DC coefficient and the (0,0) component of the 8×8 matrix may be transmitted.

因此,类似于第一方法,当8×8矩阵的(0,0)系数(AC系数)的值和DC系数的值彼此接近时,可以进一步提高压缩比。Therefore, similarly to the first method, when the value of the (0,0) coefficient (AC coefficient) and the value of the DC coefficient of the 8×8 matrix are close to each other, the compression ratio can be further improved.

图30表示第二方法中的缩放列表的语法。在图30中示出的例子中,读取系数之间的64个差值(scaling_list_delta_coef)。最后,读取DC系数与(0,0)系数(AC系数)之差(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta),并且从该差确定DC系数。FIG30 shows the syntax of the scaling list in the second method. In the example shown in FIG30 , 64 differences between coefficients are read (scaling_list_delta_coef). Finally, the difference between the DC coefficient and the (0,0) coefficient (AC coefficient) is read (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta), and the DC coefficient is determined from this difference.

在第二方法中,相应地,用于对AC系数进行解码的语法可以类似于图12中示出的相关技术的语法。也就是说,通过少量修改相关技术的例子可以获得第二方法的语法,并且第二方法的语法可以比第一方法的语法更可行。In the second method, accordingly, the syntax for decoding AC coefficients may be similar to the syntax of the related art shown in FIG12. That is, the syntax of the second method may be obtained by slightly modifying the example of the related art, and the syntax of the second method may be more feasible than the syntax of the first method.

然而,第一方法允许图像解码装置在图像解码装置接收到初始系数时恢复DC系数,而第二方法不允许图像解码装置获得DC系数,直至图像解码装置已接收到所有的系数并且已解压缩所有的DPCM数据。However, the first method allows the image decoding apparatus to restore the DC coefficient when the image decoding apparatus receives the initial coefficient, while the second method does not allow the image decoding apparatus to obtain the DC coefficient until the image decoding apparatus has received all coefficients and decompressed all DPCM data.

将在下文中描述实现上述第二方法的语法的图像编码装置。An image encoding device that implements the syntax of the above-mentioned second method will be described below.

<3-2.DPCM单元的详细示例配置><3-2. Detailed Example Configuration of DPCM Unit>

在第二方法中,图像编码装置10具有与上述第一方法中的配置基本上类似的配置。具体地,图像编码装置10具有与图14中示出的例子一样的配置。另外,正交变换/量化单元14具有与图15中示出的例子一样的配置。另外,矩阵处理单元150具有与图16中示出的例子一样的配置。In the second method, the image encoding device 10 has a configuration substantially similar to that of the first method described above. Specifically, the image encoding device 10 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG14 . Furthermore, the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG15 . Furthermore, the matrix processing unit 150 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG16 .

第二例子中的DPCM单元192的示例配置被示出在图31中。如图31中所示,在第二例子中,DPCM单元192包括AC系数缓冲器611、AC系数编码单元612、AC系数DPCM单元613和DC系数DPCM单元614。An example configuration of the DPCM unit 192 in the second example is shown in Fig. 31. As shown in Fig. 31, in the second example, the DPCM unit 192 includes an AC coefficient buffer 611, an AC coefficient encoding unit 612, an AC coefficient DPCM unit 613, and a DC coefficient DPCM unit 614.

AC系数缓冲器611存储从交叠确定单元191提供的初始AC系数(也就是说,(0,0)系数)。在所有的AC系数已经过了DPCM处理之后的预定定时,或者响应于请求,AC系数缓冲器611将存储的初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))提供给DC系数DPCM单元614。The AC coefficient buffer 611 stores the initial AC coefficient (that is, the (0, 0) coefficient) supplied from the overlap determination unit 191. The AC coefficient buffer 611 supplies the stored initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0, 0)) to the DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 at a predetermined timing after all AC coefficients have been subjected to DPCM processing, or in response to a request.

AC系数编码单元612获取从交叠确定单元191提供的初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0)),并且用常数(例如,8)减去初始AC系数的值。AC系数编码单元612将减法结果(差)提供给exp-G单元193,作为AC系数的DPCM数据的初始系数(scaling_list_delta_coef(i=0))。The AC coefficient encoding unit 612 obtains the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0, 0)) supplied from the overlap determination unit 191 and subtracts the value of the initial AC coefficient from a constant (e.g., 8). The AC coefficient encoding unit 612 supplies the subtraction result (difference) to the exp-G unit 193 as the initial coefficient (scaling_list_delta_coef (i=0)) of the DPCM data of the AC coefficient.

AC系数DPCM单元613获取从交叠确定单元191提供的AC系数,针对第二AC系数和随后的AC系数中的每一个确定与前一个AC系数的差(DPCM),并且将确定的差提供给exp-G单元193作为DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef(i=1至63))。The AC coefficient DPCM unit 613 obtains the AC coefficient supplied from the overlap determination unit 191, determines a difference (DPCM) from the previous AC coefficient for each of the second and subsequent AC coefficients, and supplies the determined difference to the exp-G unit 193 as DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef (i=1 to 63)).

DC系数DPCM单元614获取从交叠确定单元191提供的DC系数。DC系数DPCM单元614还获取保存在AC系数缓冲器611中的初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))。DC系数DPCM单元614用DC系数减去初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))以确定它们之差,并且将确定的差提供给exp-G单元193作为DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta)。The DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 acquires the DC coefficient supplied from the overlap determination unit 191. The DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 also acquires the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0, 0)) stored in the AC coefficient buffer 611. The DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 subtracts the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0, 0)) from the DC coefficient to determine the difference therebetween, and supplies the determined difference to the exp-G unit 193 as DPCM data (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta) of the DC coefficient.

如上所述,在第二方法中,确定DC系数与另一个系数(初始AC系数)之差。然后,在作为AC系数之差的AC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)的发送之后,发送该差值作为与AC系数的DPCM数据不同的DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta)。因此,类似于第一方法,图像编码装置10可以提高缩放列表的编码效率。As described above, in the second method, the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient (the initial AC coefficient) is determined. Then, after transmitting the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) of the AC coefficient as the difference between the AC coefficients, the difference is transmitted as the DPCM data (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta) of the DC coefficient that is different from the DPCM data of the AC coefficient. Thus, similar to the first method, the image encoding device 10 can improve the encoding efficiency of the scaling list.

<3-3.DPCM处理的流程><3-3. DPCM Processing Flow>

此外,在第二方法中,图像编码装置10以与参照图20中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行量化矩阵编码处理。Furthermore, in the second method, the image encoding device 10 performs the quantization matrix encoding process in a manner similar to that in the first method described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 .

将参照图32中示出的流程图描述在图20中的步骤S112中执行的第二方法中的DPCM处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the DPCM process in the second method performed in step S112 in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 32 .

当DPCM处理开始时,在步骤S401中,AC系数缓冲器611保存初始AC系数。When the DPCM process starts, in step S401 , the AC coefficient buffer 611 stores initial AC coefficients.

在步骤S402中,AC系数编码单元612用预定常数(例如,8)减去初始AC系数以确定它们之差(初始DPCM数据)。In step S402 , the AC coefficient encoding unit 612 subtracts the initial AC coefficient from a predetermined constant (eg, 8) to determine a difference therebetween (initial DPCM data).

AC系数DPCM单元613以类似于图21中的步骤S133至S135的处理的方式来执行步骤S403至S405的处理。也就是说,步骤S403至S405的处理被重复地执行以产生所有AC系数的DPCM数据(与前一个AC系数的差)。The AC coefficient DPCM unit 613 performs the processing of steps S403 to S405 in a manner similar to the processing of steps S133 to S135 in Figure 21. That is, the processing of steps S403 to S405 is repeatedly performed to generate DPCM data of all AC coefficients (differences from the previous AC coefficient).

如果在步骤S403中确定所有的AC系数已被处理(也就是说,如果不存在未处理的AC系数),则AC系数DPCM单元613使处理前进至步骤S406。If it is determined in step S403 that all the AC coefficients have been processed (that is, if there is no unprocessed AC coefficient), the AC coefficient DPCM unit 613 advances the process to step S406 .

在步骤S406中,DC系数DPCM单元614用DC系数减去在步骤S401中保存的初始AC系数以确定它们之差(DC系数的DPCM数据)。In step S406 , the DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 subtracts the initial AC coefficient saved in step S401 from the DC coefficient to determine the difference therebetween (DPCM data of the DC coefficient).

当步骤S406的处理完成时,DC系数DPCM单元614结束DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图20。When the process of step S406 is completed, the DC coefficient DPCM unit 614 ends the DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 20 .

因此,还确定DC系数与另一个系数之差并且将该差发送给图像解码装置作为DPCM数据。因此,图像编码装置10可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient is also determined and sent to the image decoding device as DPCM data.Therefore, the image encoding device 10 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<3-4.逆DPCM单元的详细示例配置><3-4. Detailed Example Configuration of Inverse DPCM Unit>

在第二方法中,图像解码装置300具有与第一方法中的配置基本上类似的配置。具体地,在第二方法中,图像解码装置300也具有与图22中示出的例子一样的配置。另外,去量化/逆正交变换单元313具有与图23中示出的例子一样的配置。此外,矩阵产生单元410具有与图24中示出的例子一样的配置。In the second method, the image decoding device 300 has a configuration substantially similar to that in the first method. Specifically, in the second method, the image decoding device 300 also has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG22. In addition, the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit 313 has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG23. Furthermore, the matrix generation unit 410 has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG24.

图33是表示第二方法中的图24中示出的逆DPCM单元552的详细配置的例子的方框图。参照图33,逆DPCM单元552包括初始设置单元621、AC系数DPCM解码单元622、AC系数缓冲器623和DC系数DPCM解码单元624。33 is a block diagram showing an example of a detailed configuration of the inverse DPCM unit 552 shown in FIG24 in the second method. Referring to FIG33 , the inverse DPCM unit 552 includes an initial setting unit 621, an AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622, an AC coefficient buffer 623, and a DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624.

初始设置单元621获取sizeID和MatrixID,并且将各种变量设置为初始值。初始设置单元621将获取的和设置的信息提供给AC系数DPCM解码单元622。The initial setting unit 621 acquires sizeID and MatrixID, and sets various variables to initial values. The initial setting unit 621 supplies the acquired and set information to the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622.

AC系数DPCM解码单元622获取从exp-G单元551提供的AC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)。AC系数DPCM解码单元622使用从初始设置单元621提供的初始设置等,对获取的AC系数的DPCM数据进行解码以确定AC系数。AC系数DPCM解码单元622将确定的AC系数(ScalingList[i])提供给逆交叠确定单元553。AC系数DPCM解码单元622还将所确定的AC系数之中的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0))提供给AC系数缓冲器623以进行保存。The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 obtains the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) of the AC coefficients provided by the exp-G unit 551. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 decodes the obtained DPCM data of the AC coefficients using the initial settings provided by the initial setting unit 621, etc., to determine the AC coefficients. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 provides the determined AC coefficients (ScalingList[i]) to the inverse overlap determination unit 553. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 also provides the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) among the determined AC coefficients to the AC coefficient buffer 623 for storage.

AC系数缓冲器623存储从AC系数DPCM解码单元622提供的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0))。在预定定时或响应于请求,AC系数缓冲器623将初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0))提供给DC系数DPCM解码单元624。The AC coefficient buffer 623 stores the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, AC coefficient (0, 0)) provided from the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622. The AC coefficient buffer 623 provides the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, AC coefficient (0, 0)) to the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 at a predetermined timing or in response to a request.

DC系数DPCM解码单元624获取从exp-G单元551提供的DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta)。DC系数DPCM解码单元624还获取存储在AC系数缓冲器623中的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0))。DC系数DPCM解码单元624使用初始AC系数对DC系数的DPCM数据进行解码以确定DC系数。DC系数DPCM解码单元624将确定的DC系数(DC_coef)提供给逆交叠确定单元553。The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 obtains the DPCM data (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta) of the DC coefficient provided by the exp-G unit 551. The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 also obtains the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, the AC coefficient (0,0)) stored in the AC coefficient buffer 623. The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 decodes the DPCM data of the DC coefficient using the initial AC coefficient to determine the DC coefficient. The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 provides the determined DC coefficient (DC_coef) to the inverse overlap determination unit 553.

因此,逆DPCM单元552可以执行正确的DPCM解码,并且可以获得DC系数和AC系数。也就是说,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the inverse DPCM unit 552 can perform correct DPCM decoding and can obtain the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient. That is, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<3-5.逆DPCM处理的流程><3-5. Flow of Inverse DPCM Processing>

此外,在第二方法中,图像解码装置300以与以上参照图27中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行量化矩阵解码处理。类似地,图像解码装置300以与以上参照图28中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行残差信号解码处理。In addition, in the second method, the image decoding device 300 performs quantization matrix decoding processing in a manner similar to that in the first method described above with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG27. Similarly, the image decoding device 300 performs residual signal decoding processing in a manner similar to that in the first method described above with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG28.

将参照图34中示出的流程图描述由逆DPCM单元552执行的逆DPCM处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the inverse DPCM process performed by the inverse DPCM unit 552 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 34 .

当逆DPCM处理开始时,在步骤S421中,初始设置单元621获取sizeID和MatrixID。When the inverse DPCM process starts, in step S421 , the initial setting unit 621 acquires sizeID and MatrixID.

在步骤S422中,初始设置单元621如下地设置coefNum。In step S422 , the initial setting unit 621 sets coefNum as follows.

coefNum=min((1<<(4+(sizeID<<1))),64)coefNum=min((1<<(4+(sizeID<<1))),64)

在步骤S423中,初始设置单元621如下地设置变量i和变量nextcoef。In step S423 , the initial setting unit 621 sets the variable i and the variable nextcoef as follows.

i=0i=0

nextcoef=8nextcoef=8

在步骤S424中,DPCM解码单元572确定是否变量i<coefNum。如果变量i小于coefNum,则初始设置单元621使处理前进至步骤S425。In step S424, the DPCM decoding unit 572 determines whether the variable i<coefNum. If the variable i is smaller than coefNum, the initial setting unit 621 advances the process to step S425.

在步骤S425中,AC系数DPCM解码单元622读取AC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)。In step S425 , the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 reads the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) of the AC coefficient.

在步骤S426中,AC系数DPCM解码单元622使用读取的DPCM数据如下地确定nextcoef,并且还确定scalingList[i]。In step S426 , the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 determines nextcoef as follows using the read DPCM data, and also determines scalingList[i].

nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256

scalingList[i]=nextcoefscalingList[i] = nextcoef

注意,计算的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0))被保存在AC系数缓冲器623中。Note that the calculated initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, AC coefficient (0,0)) is stored in the AC coefficient buffer 623.

在步骤S427中,AC系数DPCM解码单元622使变量i递增以将待处理的目标改变为随后的系数,然后使处理返回到步骤S424。In step S427 , the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 increments the variable i to change the target to be processed to the subsequent coefficient, and then returns the process to step S424 .

在步骤S424中,重复地执行步骤S424至S427的处理,直至确定变量i大于或等于coefNum。如果在步骤S424中确定变量i大于或等于coefNum,则AC系数DPCM解码单元622使处理前进至步骤428。In step S424 , the processing of steps S424 to S427 is repeatedly performed until it is determined that the variable i is greater than or equal to coefNum. If it is determined in step S424 that the variable i is greater than or equal to coefNum, the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 622 advances the processing to step 428 .

在步骤S428中,DC系数DPCM解码单元624确定sizeID是否大于1。如果确定sizeID大于1,则DC系数DPCM解码单元624使处理前进至步骤S429,并且读取DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta)。In step S428 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 determines whether sizeID is greater than 1. If it is determined that sizeID is greater than 1, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 advances the process to step S429 and reads the DPCM data of the DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta).

在步骤S430中,DC系数DPCM解码单元624获取保存在AC系数缓冲器623中的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0)),并且如下地使用初始AC系数对DC系数(DC_coef)的DPCM数据进行解码。In step S430 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 acquires the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, AC coefficient (0,0)) stored in the AC coefficient buffer 623 , and decodes the DPCM data of the DC coefficient (DC_coef) using the initial AC coefficient as follows.

DC_coef=scaling_list_dc_coef_delta+ScalingList[0]DC_coef=scaling_list_dc_coef_delta+ScalingList[0]

当获得了DC系数(DC_coef)时,DC系数DPCM解码单元624结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。When the DC coefficient (DC_coef) is obtained, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 ends the inverse DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 28 .

另外,如果在步骤S428中确定sizeID小于或等于1,则DC系数DPCM解码单元624结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。In addition, if it is determined in step S428 that sizeID is less than or equal to 1, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 ends the inverse DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 28 .

因此,DC系数与位于AC系数的开始的AC系数之差可以被正确地解码。因此,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient located at the beginning of the AC coefficients can be correctly decoded.Therefore, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<4.第四实施例><4. Fourth embodiment>

<4-1.语法:第三方法><4-1. Syntax: Third Method>

在上述第二方法中,DC系数还可能局限于小于初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))的值(第三方法)。In the above-mentioned second method, the DC coefficient may also be limited to a value smaller than the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0,0)) (third method).

这确保DC系数的DPCM数据(也就是说,通过用DC系数减去初始AC系数而获得的差值)可以是正值。因此,可以使用无符号指数Golomb码对该DPCM数据进行编码。因此,第三方法可防止DC系数大于初始AC系数,但与第一方法和第二方法相比较可以减少编码量。This ensures that the DPCM data for the DC coefficient (that is, the difference obtained by subtracting the initial AC coefficient from the DC coefficient) can be positive. Therefore, this DPCM data can be encoded using an unsigned exponential Golomb code. Thus, the third method prevents the DC coefficient from being larger than the initial AC coefficient, but reduces the amount of code compared to the first and second methods.

图35表示第三方法中的缩放列表的语法。如图35中所示,在这种情况下,DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_delta)局限于正值。Fig. 35 shows the syntax of the scaling list in the third method. As shown in Fig. 35 , in this case, DPCM data of the DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef_delta) is limited to positive values.

上述第三方法的语法可以由与第二方法中的图像编码装置类似的图像编码装置10来实现。然而,在第三方法中,exp-G单元193可以使用无符号指数Golomb码对DC系数的DPCM数据进行编码。注意,图像编码装置10可以以与第二方法中的方式类似的方式执行处理,诸如量化矩阵编码处理和DPCM处理。The syntax of the third method described above can be implemented by the image encoding device 10 similar to the image encoding device in the second method. However, in the third method, the exp-G unit 193 can encode the DPCM data of the DC coefficient using an unsigned exponential Golomb code. Note that the image encoding device 10 can perform processing such as quantization matrix encoding processing and DPCM processing in a manner similar to that in the second method.

另外,可以由图像解码装置300以与第二方法中的方式类似的方式来实现第三方法的语法。此外,图像解码装置300可以以与第二方法中的方式类似的方式执行量化矩阵解码处理。In addition, the syntax of the third method can be implemented in a manner similar to that in the second method by the image decoding device 300. In addition, the image decoding device 300 can perform quantization matrix decoding processing in a manner similar to that in the second method.

<4-2.逆DPCM处理的流程><4-2. Flow of Inverse DPCM Processing>

将参照图36中示出的流程图描述由逆DPCM单元552执行的逆DPCM处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the inverse DPCM process performed by the inverse DPCM unit 552 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 36 .

以类似于图34中的步骤S421至S429的处理的方式执行步骤S451至S459的处理。The processing of steps S451 to S459 is performed in a manner similar to the processing of steps S421 to S429 in FIG. 34 .

在步骤S460中,DC系数DPCM解码单元624获取保存在AC系数缓冲器623中的初始AC系数(ScalingList[0],也就是说,AC系数(0,0)),并且如下地使用初始AC系数对DC系数(DC_coef)的DPCM数据进行解码。In step S460 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 acquires the initial AC coefficient (ScalingList[0], that is, AC coefficient (0,0)) stored in the AC coefficient buffer 623 , and decodes the DPCM data of the DC coefficient (DC_coef) using the initial AC coefficient as follows.

DC_coef=ScalingList[0]-scaling_list_dc_coef_deltaDC_coef=ScalingList[0]-scaling_list_dc_coef_delta

当获得了DC系数(DC_coef)时,DC系数DPCM解码单元624结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。When the DC coefficient (DC_coef) is obtained, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 ends the inverse DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 28 .

另外,如果在步骤S458中确定sizeID小于或等于1,则DC系数DPCM解码单元624结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。In addition, if it is determined in step S458 that sizeID is less than or equal to 1, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 624 ends the inverse DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 28 .

因此,DC系数与位于AC系数的开始的AC系数之差可以被正确地解码。因此,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient located at the beginning of the AC coefficients can be correctly decoded.Therefore, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<5.第五实施例><5. Fifth embodiment>

<5-1.语法:第四方法><5-1. Grammar: Fourth Method>

用于替代DC系数而发送DC系数与另一个系数之差的另一个方法可以是例如:仅收集多个缩放列表的DC系数,并且通过分别获得各缩放列表的DC系数与AC系数之差来执行DPCM(第四方法)。在这种情况下,DC系数的DPCM数据是用于多个缩放列表的数据的集合,并且被发送作为与各缩放列表的AC系数的DPCM数据不同的数据。Another method for transmitting the difference between the DC coefficient and another coefficient instead of the DC coefficient is, for example, to collect only the DC coefficients of a plurality of scaling lists and perform DPCM by obtaining the difference between the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient of each scaling list (fourth method). In this case, the DPCM data of the DC coefficient is a collection of data for a plurality of scaling lists and is transmitted as data different from the DPCM data of the AC coefficient of each scaling list.

因此,例如当在缩放列表(MatrixID)的DC系数之间存在关联时,可以进一步提高压缩比。Therefore, for example, when there is a correlation between the DC coefficients of the scaling lists (MatrixID), the compression ratio can be further improved.

图37表示第四方法中的缩放列表的DC系数的语法。在这种情况下,如图37中示出的例子中所示,由于在与各缩放列表的AC系数的周期不同的周期中处理DC系数,所以用于AC系数的处理和用于DC系数的处理需要彼此独立。FIG37 shows the syntax of the DC coefficient of the scaling list in the fourth method. In this case, as shown in the example shown in FIG37, since the DC coefficient is processed in a cycle different from the cycle of the AC coefficients of each scaling list, the processing for the AC coefficient and the processing for the DC coefficient need to be independent of each other.

这确保可以实现用于缩放列表编码和解码处理的更多的各种方法,但DPCM处理和逆DPCM处理的复杂性可能增加。例如,可以被容易地实现用于在复制模式下仅复制AC系数并且使DC系数的值不同的处理。This ensures that more various methods for scaling list encoding and decoding processes can be implemented, but the complexity of DPCM processing and inverse DPCM processing may increase. For example, a process for copying only AC coefficients in copy mode and making the value of DC coefficients different can be easily implemented.

DC系数被共同处理的缩放列表的数量是任意的。The number of scaling lists whose DC coefficients are processed together is arbitrary.

<5-2.DPCM单元的详细示例配置><5-2. Detailed Example Configuration of DPCM Unit>

在第四方法中,图像编码装置10具有与上述第一方法中的配置基本上类似的配置。具体地,图像编码装置10具有与图14中示出的例子一样的配置。另外,正交变换/量化单元14具有与图15中示出的例子一样的配置。此外,矩阵处理单元150具有与图16中示出的例子一样的配置。In the fourth method, the image encoding device 10 has a configuration substantially similar to that of the first method described above. Specifically, the image encoding device 10 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG14 . Furthermore, the orthogonal transform/quantization unit 14 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG15 . Furthermore, the matrix processing unit 150 has the same configuration as that shown in FIG16 .

第四方法中的DPCM单元192的示例配置被示出在图38中。如图38中所示,在这种情况下,DPCM单元192包括AC系数DPCM单元631、DC系数缓冲器632和DC系数DPCM单元633。An example configuration of the DPCM unit 192 in the fourth method is shown in Fig. 38. As shown in Fig. 38, in this case, the DPCM unit 192 includes an AC coefficient DPCM unit 631, a DC coefficient buffer 632, and a DC coefficient DPCM unit 633.

AC系数DPCM单元631对从交叠确定单元191提供的每个缩放列表的各AC系数执行DPCM处理。具体地,AC系数DPCM单元631针对每个缩放列表用预定常数(例如,8)减去初始AC系数,并且用前一个AC系数减去正被处理的AC系数(当前AC系数)。AC系数DPCM单元631将针对每个缩放列表产生的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)提供给exp-G单元193。The AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 performs DPCM processing on each AC coefficient of each scaling list provided from the overlap determination unit 191. Specifically, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 subtracts the initial AC coefficient from a predetermined constant (e.g., 8) for each scaling list, and subtracts the AC coefficient being processed (current AC coefficient) from the previous AC coefficient. The AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 provides the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) generated for each scaling list to the exp-G unit 193.

DC系数缓冲器632存储从交叠确定单元191提供的各缩放列表的DC系数。在预定定时或响应于请求,DC系数缓冲器632将存储的DC系数提供给DC系数DPCM单元633。The DC coefficient buffer 632 stores the DC coefficient of each scaling list supplied from the overlap determination unit 191. The DC coefficient buffer 632 supplies the stored DC coefficient to the DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 at a predetermined timing or in response to a request.

DC系数DPCM单元633获取累积在DC系数缓冲器632中的DC系数。DC系数DPCM单元633确定获取的DC系数的DPCM数据。具体地,DC系数DPCM单元633用预定常数(例如,8)减去初始DC系数,并且用前一个DC系数减去正被处理的DC系数(当前DC系数)。DC系数DPCM单元633将产生的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)提供给exp-G单元193。The DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 obtains the DC coefficient accumulated in the DC coefficient buffer 632. The DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 determines DPCM data for the obtained DC coefficient. Specifically, the DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 subtracts the initial DC coefficient from a predetermined constant (e.g., 8) and subtracts the DC coefficient being processed (the current DC coefficient) from the previous DC coefficient. The DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 provides the generated DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) to the exp-G unit 193.

因此,图像编码装置10可以提高缩放列表的编码效率。Therefore, the image encoding device 10 can improve the encoding efficiency of the scaling list.

<5-3.DPCM处理的流程><5-3. DPCM Processing Flow>

此外,在第四方法中,图像编码装置10以与以上参照图20中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行量化矩阵编码处理。Furthermore, in the fourth method, the image encoding device 10 performs the quantization matrix encoding process in a manner similar to that in the first method described above with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 20 .

将参照图39中示出的流程图描述在图20中的步骤S112中执行的第四方法中的DPCM处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the DPCM process in the fourth method performed in step S112 in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 39 .

AC系数DPCM单元631以类似于图32中的步骤S401至S405的处理(第二方法中的处理)的方式来执行步骤S481至S485的处理。The AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 performs the processing of steps S481 to S485 in a manner similar to the processing of steps S401 to S405 in FIG. 32 (the processing in the second method).

如果在步骤S483中确定所有的AC系数已被处理,则AC系数DPCM单元631使处理前进至步骤S486。If it is determined in step S483 that all the AC coefficients have been processed, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 advances the process to step S486 .

在步骤S486中,AC系数DPCM单元631确定是否其中对DC系数共同进行DPCM编码的所有的缩放列表(或差矩阵)已被处理。如果确定存在未处理的缩放列表(或差矩阵),则AC系数DPCM单元631使处理返回到步骤S481。In step S486, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 determines whether all scaling lists (or difference matrices) in which the DC coefficient is commonly DPCM-encoded have been processed. If it is determined that there is an unprocessed scaling list (or difference matrix), the AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 returns the process to step S481.

如果在步骤S486中确定所有的缩放列表(或差矩阵)已被处理,则AC系数DPCM单元631使处理前进至步骤S487。If it is determined in step S486 that all scaling lists (or difference matrices) have been processed, the AC coefficient DPCM unit 631 advances the process to step S487.

DC系数DPCM单元633以类似于步骤S481至S485的处理的方式对存储在DC系数缓冲器632中的DC系数执行步骤S487至S491的处理。The DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 performs the processes of steps S487 to S491 on the DC coefficient stored in the DC coefficient buffer 632 in a manner similar to the processes of steps S481 to S485 .

如果在步骤S489中确定存储在DC系数缓冲器632中的所有的DC系数已被处理,则DC系数DPCM单元633结束DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图20。If it is determined in step S489 that all the DC coefficients stored in the DC coefficient buffer 632 have been processed, the DC coefficient DPCM unit 633 ends the DPCM processing and returns the processing to FIG. 20 .

通过以上述方式执行DPCM处理,图像编码装置10可以提高缩放列表的编码效率。By performing the DPCM process in the above-described manner, the image encoding device 10 can improve the encoding efficiency of the scaling list.

<5-4.逆DPCM单元的详细示例配置><5-4. Detailed Example Configuration of Inverse DPCM Unit>

第四方法中的图像解码装置300具有与第一方法中的配置基本上类似的配置。具体地,在第四方法中,图像解码装置300也具有与图22中示出的例子一样的配置。另外,去量化/逆正交变换单元313具有与图23中示出的例子一样的配置。此外,矩阵产生单元410具有与图24中示出的例子一样的配置。The image decoding device 300 in the fourth method has a configuration that is basically similar to that in the first method. Specifically, in the fourth method, the image decoding device 300 also has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG22. In addition, the dequantization/inverse orthogonal transformation unit 313 has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG23. In addition, the matrix generation unit 410 has the same configuration as the example shown in FIG24.

图40是表示第四方法中的图24中示出的逆DPCM单元552的详细配置的例子的方框图。参照图40,逆DPCM单元552包括初始设置单元641、AC系数DPCM解码单元642和DC系数DPCM解码单元643。40 is a block diagram showing an example of a detailed configuration of the inverse DPCM unit 552 shown in FIG24 in the fourth method.

初始设置单元641获取sizeID和MatrixID,并且将各种变量设置为初始值。初始设置单元641将获取的和设置的信息提供给AC系数DPCM解码单元642和DC系数DPCM解码单元643。The initial setting unit 641 acquires sizeID and MatrixID and sets various variables to initial values. The initial setting unit 641 supplies the acquired and set information to the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 and the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643.

AC系数DPCM解码单元642获取从exp-G单元551提供的AC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef(ac))。AC系数DPCM解码单元642使用从初始设置单元641提供的初始设置等对获取的AC系数的DPCM数据进行解码,并且确定AC系数。AC系数DPCM解码单元642将确定的AC系数(ScalingList[i])提供给逆交叠确定单元553。AC系数DPCM解码单元642对多个缩放列表执行上述处理。The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 acquires the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef(ac)) of the AC coefficient supplied from the exp-G unit 551. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 decodes the acquired DPCM data of the AC coefficient using the initial settings supplied from the initial setting unit 641, and determines the AC coefficient. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 supplies the determined AC coefficient (ScalingList[i]) to the inverse overlap determination unit 553. The AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 performs the above-described processing on a plurality of scaling lists.

DC系数DPCM解码单元643获取从exp-G单元551提供的DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef(dc))。DC系数DPCM解码单元643使用从初始设置单元641提供的初始设置等对获取的DC系数的DPCM数据进行解码,并且确定各缩放列表的DC系数。DC系数DPCM解码单元643将确定的DC系数(scaling_list_dc_coef)提供给逆交叠确定单元553。The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 obtains the DPCM data of the DC coefficient (scaling_list_delta_coef(dc)) provided from the exp-G unit 551. The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 decodes the obtained DPCM data of the DC coefficient using the initial settings provided from the initial setting unit 641, and determines the DC coefficient of each scaling list. The DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 provides the determined DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef) to the inverse overlap determination unit 553.

因此,逆DPCM单元552可以执行正确的DPCM解码,并且可以获得DC系数和AC系数。也就是说,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the inverse DPCM unit 552 can perform correct DPCM decoding and can obtain the DC coefficient and the AC coefficient. That is, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<5-5.逆DPCM处理的流程><5-5. Flow of Inverse DPCM Processing>

此外,在第四方法中,图像解码装置300以与以上参照图27中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行量化矩阵解码处理。类似地,图像解码装置300以与以上参照图28中示出的流程图描述的第一方法中的方式类似的方式执行残差信号解码处理。In addition, in the fourth method, the image decoding device 300 performs a quantization matrix decoding process in a manner similar to that in the first method described above with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG27. Similarly, the image decoding device 300 performs a residual signal decoding process in a manner similar to that in the first method described above with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG28.

将参照图41和图42中示出的流程图描述由逆DPCM单元552执行的逆DPCM处理的流程的例子。An example of the flow of the inverse DPCM process performed by the inverse DPCM unit 552 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 .

当逆DPCM处理开始时,初始设置单元641和AC系数DPCM解码单元642以与图34中的步骤S421至S427的处理中的方式类似的方式执行步骤S511至S517的处理。When the inverse DPCM process starts, the initial setting unit 641 and the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 perform the processes of steps S511 to S517 in a manner similar to that in the processes of steps S421 to S427 in FIG. 34 .

如果在步骤S514中确定变量i大于或等于coefNum,则AC系数DPCM解码单元642使处理前进至步骤S518。If it is determined in step S514 that the variable i is greater than or equal to coefNum, the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 advances the process to step S518 .

在步骤S518中,AC系数DPCM解码单元642确定是否其中对DC系数共同进行DPCM处理的所有的缩放列表(差矩阵)已被处理。如果确定存在未处理的缩放列表(差矩阵),则AC系数DPCM解码单元642使处理返回到步骤S511,并且重复地执行随后的处理。In step S518, the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 determines whether all scaling lists (difference matrices) in which the DC coefficient is commonly subjected to DPCM processing have been processed. If it is determined that there is an unprocessed scaling list (difference matrix), the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 returns the process to step S511 and repeatedly performs the subsequent processing.

另外,如果确定不存在未处理的缩放列表(差矩阵),则AC系数DPCM解码单元642使处理前进至图42。In addition, if it is determined that there is no unprocessed scaling list (difference matrix), the AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 642 advances the process to FIG. 42 .

在图42中的步骤S521中,初始设置单元641如下地设置sizeID和变量nextcoef。In step S521 in FIG. 42 , the initial setting unit 641 sets sizeID and a variable nextcoef as follows.

sizeID=2sizeID=2

nextcoef=8nextcoef=8

另外,在步骤S522中,初始设置单元641如下地设置MatrixID。In addition, in step S522 , the initial setting unit 641 sets MatrixID as follows.

MatrixID=0MatrixID=0

在步骤S523中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643确定是否sizeID<4。如果确定sizeID小于4,则DC系数DPCM解码单元643使处理前进至步骤S524。In step S523 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 determines whether sizeID<4. If it is determined that sizeID is smaller than 4, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 advances the process to step S524 .

在步骤S524中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643确定是否满足MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6。如果确定满足MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6,则DC系数DPCM解码单元643使处理前进至步骤S525。In step S524, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 determines whether MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6 is satisfied. If it is determined that MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6 is satisfied, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 advances the process to step S525.

在步骤S525中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643读取DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_delta_coef)。In step S525 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 reads the DPCM data (scaling_list_delta_coef) of the DC coefficient.

在步骤S526中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643使用读取的DPCM数据如下地确定nextcoef,并且还确定scaling_dc_coef。In step S526 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 determines nextcoef as follows using the read DPCM data, and also determines scaling_dc_coef.

nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256nextcoef=(nextcoef+scaling_list_delta_coef+256)%256

scaling_dc_coef[sizeID-2][MatrixID]=nextcoefscaling_dc_coef[sizeID-2][MatrixID]=nextcoef

在步骤S527中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643使MatrixID递增以将处理目标改变为随后的DC系数(随后的缩放列表或残差矩阵),然后使处理返回到步骤S524。In step S527 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 increments the MatrixID to change the processing target to the subsequent DC coefficient (the subsequent scaling list or residual matrix), and then returns the process to step S524 .

如果在步骤S524中确定不满足MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6,则DC系数DPCM解码单元643使处理前进至步骤S528。If it is determined in step S524 that MatrixID<(sizeID==3)?2:6 is not satisfied, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 advances the process to step S528.

在步骤S528中,DC系数DPCM解码单元643使sizeID递增以将处理目标改变为随后的DC系数(随后的缩放列表或残差矩阵),然后使处理返回到步骤S523。In step S528 , the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 increments the sizeID to change the processing target to the subsequent DC coefficient (the subsequent scaling list or residual matrix), and then returns the process to step S523 .

如果在步骤S523中确定sizeID大于或等于4,则DC系数DPCM解码单元643结束逆DPCM处理,并且使处理返回到图28。If it is determined in step S523 that sizeID is greater than or equal to 4, the DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit 643 ends the inverse DPCM process and returns the process to FIG. 28 .

因此,DC系数之差可以被正确地解码。因此,图像解码装置300可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。Therefore, the difference between the DC coefficients can be correctly decoded.Therefore, the image decoding device 300 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<6.第六实施例><6. Sixth embodiment>

<6-1.其它语法:第一例子><6-1. Other syntax: First example>

图43表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子。该附图对应于图12。在图12中示出的例子中,nextcoef的初始值被设置为预定常数(例如,8)。替代地,如图43中所示,nextcoef的初始值可被DC系数的DPCM数据(scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8)改写。FIG43 shows another example of the syntax of the scaling list. This figure corresponds to FIG12. In the example shown in FIG12, the initial value of nextcoef is set to a predetermined constant (e.g., 8). Alternatively, as shown in FIG43, the initial value of nextcoef can be overwritten by the DPCM data of the DC coefficient (scaling_list_dc_coef_minus8).

因此,可以减少16×16缩放列表和32×32缩放列表中的初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))的编码量。Therefore, the encoding amount of the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0, 0)) in the 16×16 scaling list and the 32×32 scaling list can be reduced.

<6-2.其它语法:第二例子><6-2. Other syntax: Second example>

图44表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子。该附图对应于图12。FIG44 shows another example of the syntax of the zoom list. This figure corresponds to FIG12.

在图12中示出的例子中,当作为在复制模式下指定参考目的地的信息的scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值是“0”时,参照比正被处理的当前缩放列表早一个缩放列表的缩放列表,并且当scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值是“1”时,参照比正被处理的当前缩放列表早两个缩放列表的缩放列表。In the example shown in Figure 12, when the value of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta, which is information specifying a reference destination in copy mode, is "0", a scaling list that is one scaling list earlier than the current scaling list being processed is referenced, and when the value of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta is "1", a scaling list that is two scaling lists earlier than the current scaling list being processed is referenced.

与之相比,在图44中示出的例子中,如图44的部分C中所示,当作为在复制模式下指定参考目的地的信息的scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值是“0”时,参照默认缩放列表,并且当scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的值是“1”时,参照前一个缩放列表。In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 44 , as shown in part C of FIG. 44 , when the value of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta, which is information specifying a reference destination in copy mode, is “0,” the default scaling list is referenced, and when the value of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta is “1,” the previous scaling list is referenced.

以这种方式,修改scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta的语义可以以图44的部分B中示出的方式简化语法,并且可以减少DPCM处理和逆DPCM处理的负载。In this way, modifying the semantics of scaling_list_pred_matrix_id_delta can simplify the syntax in the manner shown in part B of FIG. 44 , and can reduce the load of the DPCM process and the inverse DPCM process.

<6-3.其它语法:第三例子><6-3. Other syntax: third example>

图45表示缩放列表的语法的另一个例子。该附图对应于图12。FIG45 shows another example of the syntax of the zoom list. This figure corresponds to FIG12.

在图45中示出的例子中,既使用上述图43中示出的例子又使用上述图44中示出的例子。In the example shown in FIG. 45 , both the example shown in FIG. 43 described above and the example shown in FIG. 44 described above are used.

在图45中示出的例子中,相应地,可以减少16×16缩放列表和32×32缩放列表中的初始AC系数(AC系数(0,0))的编码量。另外,语法可以被简化,并且可以减少DPCM处理和逆DPCM处理的负载。In the example shown in FIG45 , the amount of coding of the initial AC coefficient (AC coefficient (0,0)) in the 16×16 scaling list and the 32×32 scaling list can be reduced accordingly. In addition, the syntax can be simplified, and the load of the DPCM process and the inverse DPCM process can be reduced.

在前面的实施例中,预定常数的值是任意的。另外,缩放列表的尺寸也是任意的。In the above embodiments, the value of the predetermined constant is arbitrary. In addition, the size of the zoom list is also arbitrary.

另外,尽管前面已给出缩放列表、预测矩阵或它们之间的差矩阵的尺寸变换处理的描述,但尺寸变换处理可以是用于实际产生其尺寸已被变换的矩阵的处理,或者可以是用于在不实际产生矩阵的数据的情况下设置如何从存储器读取矩阵中的每个元素的处理(矩阵数据的读取控制)。In addition, although a description has been given above of the size conversion processing of the scaling list, the prediction matrix, or the difference matrix therebetween, the size conversion processing may be processing for actually generating a matrix whose size has been converted, or may be processing for setting how each element in the matrix is read from the memory without actually generating the data of the matrix (reading control of the matrix data).

在上述尺寸变换处理中,其尺寸已被变换的矩阵中的每个元素由其尺寸还未被变换的矩阵中的任何元素构成。也就是说,通过使用某个方法(诸如,读取矩阵中的一些元素或多次读取一个元素)读取存储在存储器中的其尺寸还未被变换的矩阵中的元素,可产生其尺寸已被变换的矩阵。换句话说,定义用于读取每个元素的方法(或执行矩阵数据的读取控制)以基本上实现上述尺寸变换。这种方法可去除诸如将其尺寸已被变换的矩阵数据写到存储器的处理。另外,其尺寸已被变换的矩阵数据的读取基本上取决于如何执行最近邻居内插等,因此,可通过比较低负载的处理(诸如,选择预先准备的多个选项中的一个合适的选项)来实现尺寸变换。因此,上述方法可减少尺寸变换的负载。In the above-mentioned resizing process, each element in the matrix whose size has been transformed is composed of any element in the matrix whose size has not yet been transformed. That is, by reading the elements in the matrix whose size has not yet been transformed stored in the memory using a certain method (such as, reading some elements in the matrix or reading an element multiple times), the matrix whose size has been transformed can be generated. In other words, a method for reading each element (or performing read control of matrix data) is defined to basically achieve the above-mentioned resizing. This method can eliminate the processing such as writing the matrix data whose size has been transformed to the memory. In addition, the reading of the matrix data whose size has been transformed basically depends on how to perform nearest neighbor interpolation, etc. Therefore, the resizing can be achieved through a relatively low-load processing (such as, selecting a suitable option from a plurality of options prepared in advance). Therefore, the above-mentioned method can reduce the load of resizing.

也就是说,上述尺寸变换处理包括用于实际产生其尺寸已被变换的矩阵数据的处理,并且还包括矩阵数据的读取控制。That is, the above-mentioned size conversion processing includes processing for actually generating matrix data whose size has been converted, and also includes reading control of the matrix data.

注意,尽管在差矩阵被编码和发送的情况下进行前面的描述,但这仅是说明性的,并且缩放列表可被编码和发送。换句话说,已在以上被描述为待处理的系数的缩放列表的AC系数和DC系数可以是缩放列表与预测矩阵之间的差矩阵的AC系数和DC系数。Note that although the above description is made in the case where the difference matrix is encoded and transmitted, this is merely illustrative, and the scaling list may be encoded and transmitted. In other words, the AC coefficients and DC coefficients of the scaling list described above as coefficients to be processed may be the AC coefficients and DC coefficients of the difference matrix between the scaling list and the prediction matrix.

另外,关于缩放列表的参数、标记等(诸如,缩放列表的尺寸和列表ID)的信息的编码量可通过下述方式减少:例如,获得该信息与以前发送的信息之差并且发送该差。In addition, the encoding amount of information about parameters, flags, etc. of the scaling list (such as the size and list ID of the scaling list) can be reduced by, for example, obtaining the difference between the information and previously transmitted information and transmitting the difference.

另外,尽管已在大尺寸的量化矩阵或差矩阵被下转换和发送的情况下进行前面的描述,但这仅是说明性的,并且量化矩阵或差矩阵可在未被下转换的情况下被发送,同时用于量化的量化矩阵的尺寸保持不变。In addition, although the foregoing description has been made in the case where a large-sized quantization matrix or difference matrix is down-converted and transmitted, this is merely illustrative, and the quantization matrix or difference matrix may be transmitted without being down-converted while the size of the quantization matrix used for quantization remains unchanged.

本技术可以被应用于包括量化和去量化的任何类型的图像编码和解码。The present technique can be applied to any type of image encoding and decoding involving quantization and dequantization.

另外,本技术还可以被应用于例如用于经由网络介质(诸如,卫星广播、有线电视、因特网或移动电话)接收使用正交变换(诸如,离散余弦变换)和运动补偿(诸如,MPEG或H.26x)压缩的图像信息(比特流)的图像编码装置和图像解码装置。本技术还可以被应用于用于存储介质(诸如,光盘、磁盘和闪存)上的处理的图像编码装置和图像解码装置。另外,本技术还可以被应用于上述图像编码装置和图像解码装置中所包括的量化装置和去量化装置等。In addition, the present technology can also be applied to, for example, image encoding devices and image decoding devices for receiving image information (bitstream) compressed using orthogonal transform (such as discrete cosine transform) and motion compensation (such as MPEG or H.26x) via network media (such as satellite broadcasting, cable television, the Internet, or mobile phones). The present technology can also be applied to image encoding devices and image decoding devices for processing on storage media (such as optical disks, magnetic disks, and flash memory). In addition, the present technology can also be applied to quantization devices and dequantization devices included in the above-mentioned image encoding devices and image decoding devices.

<7.第七实施例><7. Seventh embodiment>

<应用于多视点图像编码和多视点图像解码><Application to Multi-view Image Coding and Multi-view Image Decoding>

上述一系列处理可以被应用于多视点图像编码和多视点图像解码。图46表示多视点图像编码方案的例子。The above series of processing can be applied to multi-view image encoding and multi-view image decoding. Fig. 46 shows an example of a multi-view image encoding scheme.

如图46中所示,多视点图像包括在多个视点(或视图)的图像。多视点图像中的多个视图包括:基本视图,每个基本视图在不使用另一个视图的图像的情况下使用它的图像而被编码和解码;和非基本视图,每个非基本视图使用另一个视图的图像而被编码和解码。每个非基本视图可使用基本视图的图像或使用任何其它非基本视图的图像而被编码和解码。As shown in FIG46 , a multi-view image includes images from multiple viewpoints (or views). The multiple views in the multi-view image include base views, each of which is encoded and decoded using its image without using images of another view, and non-base views, each of which is encoded and decoded using images of another view. Each non-base view can be encoded and decoded using an image of the base view or using images of any other non-base view.

当图46中示出的多视点图像将要被编码和解码时,每个视图的图像被编码和解码。以上在前面的实施例中描述的方法可被应用于每个视图的编码和解码。这可以抑制各视图的图像质量的降低。When the multi-viewpoint images shown in FIG46 are to be encoded and decoded, the image of each view is encoded and decoded. The method described above in the previous embodiment can be applied to the encoding and decoding of each view. This can suppress the degradation of the image quality of each view.

另外,可在每个视图的编码和解码中共享以上在前面的实施例中描述的方法中使用的标记和参数。这可以抑制编码效率的降低。In addition, the flags and parameters used in the methods described in the previous embodiments can be shared in encoding and decoding of each view, which can suppress a decrease in encoding efficiency.

更具体地,例如,可在每个视图的编码和解码中共享关于缩放列表的信息(例如,参数、标记等)。More specifically, for example, information about the scaling list (eg, parameters, flags, etc.) may be shared in encoding and decoding of each view.

当然,可在每个视图的编码和解码中共享任何其它需要的信息。Of course, any other required information may be shared in the encoding and decoding of each view.

例如,当将要发送缩放列表或序列参数集(SPS)或图像参数集(PPS)中所包括的关于缩放列表的信息时,如果在视图之间共享这些参数集(SPS和PPS),则缩放列表或关于缩放列表的信息也被相应地共享。这可以抑制编码效率的降低。For example, when a scaling list or information about a scaling list included in a sequence parameter set (SPS) or a picture parameter set (PPS) is to be transmitted, if these parameter sets (SPS and PPS) are shared between views, the scaling list or information about the scaling list is also shared accordingly. This can suppress a reduction in coding efficiency.

另外,可根据视图之间的差异值改变基本视图的缩放列表(或量化矩阵)中的矩阵元素。此外,可发送用于针对基本视图的缩放列表(量化矩阵)中的矩阵元素调整非基本视图矩阵元素的偏移值。因此,可以抑制编码量的增加。In addition, the matrix elements in the scaling list (or quantization matrix) of the base view can be changed according to the difference value between views. In addition, offset values used to adjust the matrix elements of non-base views with respect to the matrix elements in the scaling list (quantization matrix) of the base view can be transmitted. This can suppress the increase in the amount of code.

例如,每个视图的缩放列表可被预先分开地发送。当将要针对每个视图改变缩放列表时,可仅发送指示与预先发送的缩放列表中的对应缩放列表的差的信息。指示该差的信息是任意的,并且可以是例如以4×4或8×8为单位的信息或矩阵之差。For example, the zoom list for each view may be transmitted separately in advance. When the zoom list is to be changed for each view, only information indicating the difference from the corresponding zoom list in the previously transmitted zoom list may be transmitted. The information indicating the difference is arbitrary and may be, for example, information in units of 4×4 or 8×8 or a difference in matrices.

注意,如果缩放列表或关于缩放列表的信息在视图之间被共享但SPS或PPS未被共享,则可以能够参照其它视图的SPS或PPS(也就是说,能够使用其它视图的缩放列表或关于缩放列表的信息)。Note that if a zoom list or information about a zoom list is shared between views but an SPS or PPS is not shared, it may be possible to refer to the SPS or PPS of other views (that is, use the zoom list or information about the zoom list of other views).

此外,如果这种多视点图像被表示为具有YUV图像和与视图之间的差异的量对应的深度图像(深度)作为分量的图像,则可使用每个分量(Y,U,V和深度)的图像的独立的缩放列表或关于缩放列表的信息。Furthermore, if such a multi-view image is represented as an image having a YUV image and a depth image (depth) corresponding to the amount of difference between views as components, an independent scaling list or information about the scaling list of the image for each component (Y, U, V, and depth) may be used.

例如,由于深度图像(深度)是边缘的图像,所以不需要缩放列表。因此,虽然SPS或PPS指定缩放列表的使用,但缩放列表可不被应用于(或者可应用所有的矩阵元素相同(或平坦)的缩放列表)深度图像(深度)。For example, since the depth image (depth) is an edge image, no scaling list is required. Therefore, although the SPS or PPS specifies the use of a scaling list, the scaling list may not be applied to the depth image (or a scaling list with the same (or flat) matrix elements may be applied).

<多视点图像编码装置><Multi-viewpoint Image Coding Device>

图47是表示用于执行上述多视点图像编码操作的多视点图像编码装置的示图。如图47中所示,多视点图像编码装置700包括编码单元701、编码单元702和多路复用单元703。47 is a diagram showing a multi-view image encoding device for performing the above-described multi-view image encoding operation. As shown in FIG47 , a multi-view image encoding device 700 includes an encoding unit 701 , an encoding unit 702 , and a multiplexing unit 703 .

编码单元701对基本视图的图像进行编码,并且产生编码基本视图图像流。编码单元702对非基本视图的图像进行编码,并且产生编码非基本视图图像流。多路复用单元703多路复用由编码单元701产生的编码基本视图图像流和由编码单元702产生的编码非基本视图图像流,并且产生编码多视点图像流。Coding unit 701 encodes images of a base view and generates an encoded base view image stream. Coding unit 702 encodes images of non-base views and generates an encoded non-base view image stream. Multiplexing unit 703 multiplexes the encoded base view image stream generated by coding unit 701 and the encoded non-base view image stream generated by coding unit 702 and generates an encoded multi-viewpoint image stream.

图像编码装置10(图14)可以被用于多视点图像编码装置700的编码单元701和编码单元702中的每一个。也就是说,可以抑制每个视图的编码中的缩放列表的编码量的增加,并且可以抑制每个视图的图像质量的降低。另外,编码单元701和编码单元702可以使用相同的标记或参数(也就是说,标记和参数可以被共享)来执行处理(诸如,量化和去量化)。因此,可以抑制编码效率的降低。The image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) can be used for each of the encoding units 701 and 702 of the multi-view image encoding device 700 . That is, an increase in the amount of code for the scaling list in encoding each view can be suppressed, and a decrease in the image quality of each view can be suppressed. Furthermore, the encoding units 701 and 702 can perform processing (such as quantization and dequantization) using the same flags or parameters (that is, the flags and parameters can be shared). Therefore, a decrease in encoding efficiency can be suppressed.

<多视点图像解码装置><Multi-viewpoint image decoding device>

图48是表示用于执行上述多视点图像解码操作的多视点图像解码装置的示图。如图48中所示,多视点图像解码装置710包括多路解复用单元711、解码单元712和解码单元713。48 is a diagram showing a multi-view image decoding device for performing the above-described multi-view image decoding operation. As shown in FIG48 , a multi-view image decoding device 710 includes a demultiplexing unit 711 , a decoding unit 712 , and a decoding unit 713 .

多路解复用单元711对已多路复用编码基本视图图像流和编码非基本视图图像流的编码多视点图像流进行多路解复用,并且提取编码基本视图图像流和编码非基本视图图像流。解码单元712对由多路解复用单元711提取的编码基本视图图像流进行解码,并且获得基本视图的图像。解码单元713对由多路解复用单元711提取的编码非基本视图图像流进行解码,并且获得非基本视图的图像。The demultiplexing unit 711 demultiplexes the coded multi-view image stream, which is multiplexed with the coded base view image stream and the coded non-base view image stream, and extracts the coded base view image stream and the coded non-base view image stream. The decoding unit 712 decodes the coded base view image stream extracted by the demultiplexing unit 711 and obtains the image of the base view. The decoding unit 713 decodes the coded non-base view image stream extracted by the demultiplexing unit 711 and obtains the image of the non-base view.

图像解码装置300(图22)可以被用于多视点图像解码装置710的解码单元712和解码单元713中的每一个。也就是说,可以抑制每个视图的解码中的缩放列表的编码量的增加,并且可以抑制每个视图的图像质量的降低。另外,解码单元712和解码单元713可以使用相同的标记和参数(也就是说,标记和参数可以被共享)来执行处理(诸如,量化和去量化)。因此,可以抑制编码效率的降低。The image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) can be used in each of the decoding units 712 and 713 of the multi-view image decoding device 710 . That is, an increase in the amount of code required for scaling lists in decoding each view can be suppressed, and a decrease in image quality for each view can be suppressed. Furthermore, the decoding units 712 and 713 can perform processing (such as quantization and dequantization) using the same flags and parameters (that is, the flags and parameters can be shared). Therefore, a decrease in coding efficiency can be suppressed.

<8.第八实施例><8. Eighth embodiment>

<应用于分层图像编码和分层图像解码><Apply to layered image coding and layered image decoding>

上述一系列处理可以被应用于分层图像编码和分层图像解码(可缩放编码和可缩放解码)。图49表示分层图像编码方案的例子。The above series of processing can be applied to layered image coding and layered image decoding (scalable coding and scalable decoding). Fig. 49 shows an example of a layered image coding scheme.

分层图像编码(可缩放编码)是这样的处理:将图像划分成多个层(分层)以便针对预定参数为图像数据提供可缩放性功能,并且对各层进行编码。分层图像解码(可缩放解码)是与分层图像编码对应的解码处理。Layered image coding (scalable coding) is a process of dividing an image into multiple layers (layers) to provide scalability functions for image data with respect to predetermined parameters, and encoding each layer. Layered image decoding (scalable decoding) is a decoding process corresponding to layered image coding.

如图49中所示,在图像分层中,使用具有可缩放性功能的预定参数作为参考,一个图像被划分为多个子图像(或层)。也就是说,分解为层的图像(或分层图像)包括多个分层(或层)图像,所述多个分层(或层)图像具有所述预定参数的不同值。分层图像中的所述多个层包括:基本层,每个基本层在不使用另一层的图像的情况下使用它的图像而被编码和解码;和非基本层(也被称为增强层),每个非基本层使用另一层的图像而被编码和解码。每个非基本层可使用基本层的图像或使用任何其它非基本层的图像而被编码和解码。As shown in FIG49 , in image layering, a single image is divided into multiple sub-images (or layers) using a predetermined parameter with a scalability function as a reference. That is, the image (or layered image) decomposed into layers includes multiple layered (or layer) images having different values for the predetermined parameter. The multiple layers in the layered image include base layers, each of which is encoded and decoded using its images without using images of another layer, and non-base layers (also called enhancement layers), each of which is encoded and decoded using images of another layer. Each non-base layer can be encoded and decoded using images of the base layer or using images of any other non-base layer.

通常,每个非基本层包括它的图像与另一层的图像之间的差图像的数据(差数据)以便减少冗余。例如,在一个图像被分解为两个层(即,基本层和非基本层(也被称为增强层))的情况下,可仅使用基本层的数据获得具有低于原始图像的质量的图像,并且可通过组合基本层的数据和非基本层的数据来获得原始图像(也就是说,具有高质量的图像)。Typically, each non-base layer includes data of a difference image (difference data) between its image and an image of another layer in order to reduce redundancy. For example, when one image is decomposed into two layers (i.e., a base layer and a non-base layer (also referred to as an enhancement layer)), an image with lower quality than the original image can be obtained using only the data of the base layer, and the original image (i.e., an image with higher quality) can be obtained by combining the data of the base layer and the data of the non-base layer.

以上述方式执行的图像的分层可以方便根据情况获得具有各种质量的图像。这确保:可以在不执行译码的情况下根据终端和网络的能力从服务器发送图像压缩信息,从而例如仅关于基本层的图像压缩信息被发送给具有低处理能力的终端(诸如,移动电话)以再现具有低空间时间分辨率或低质量的运动图像,并且除了关于基本层的图像压缩信息之外,关于增强层的图像压缩信息也被发送给具有高处理能力的终端(诸如,电视机和个人计算机)以再现具有高空间时间分辨率或高质量的运动图像。The image layering performed in the above manner facilitates obtaining images of various qualities depending on the situation. This ensures that image compression information can be transmitted from the server according to the capabilities of the terminal and network without performing decoding. For example, only the image compression information about the base layer is transmitted to a terminal with low processing power (such as a mobile phone) to reproduce a moving image with low spatial and temporal resolution or low quality, and in addition to the image compression information about the base layer, the image compression information about the enhancement layer is also transmitted to a terminal with high processing power (such as a television set or personal computer) to reproduce a moving image with high spatial and temporal resolution or high quality.

当图49中示出的例子中的分层图像将要被编码和解码时,每个层的图像被编码和解码。以上在每个前面的实施例中描述的方法可被应用于每个层的编码和解码。这可以抑制各层的图像质量的降低。When the layered images in the example shown in FIG49 are to be encoded and decoded, the image of each layer is encoded and decoded. The method described above in each of the previous embodiments can be applied to the encoding and decoding of each layer. This can suppress the degradation of the image quality of each layer.

另外,可在每个层的编码和解码中共享以上在每个前面的实施例中描述的方法中使用的标记和参数。这可以抑制编码效率的降低。In addition, the flags and parameters used in the method described in each of the previous embodiments can be shared in encoding and decoding of each layer. This can suppress a decrease in encoding efficiency.

更具体地,例如,可在每个层的编码和解码中共享关于缩放列表的信息(例如,参数、标记等)。More specifically, for example, information about the scaling list (eg, parameters, flags, etc.) may be shared in encoding and decoding of each layer.

当然,可在每个层的编码和解码中共享任何其它需要的信息。Of course, any other required information may be shared in the encoding and decoding of each layer.

分层图像的例子包括按照空间分辨率分层的图像(也被称为空间分辨率可缩放性)(空间可缩放性)。在具有空间分辨率可缩放性的分层图像中,图像的分辨率针对每层而不同。例如,具有空间最低分辨率的图像的层被指定为基本层,并且具有比基本层高的分辨率的图像的层被指定为非基本层(增强层)。Examples of layered images include images layered according to spatial resolution (also referred to as spatial resolution scalability) (spatial scalability). In layered images with spatial resolution scalability, the resolution of the image differs for each layer. For example, the layer with the lowest spatial resolution is designated as the base layer, and the layer with a higher resolution than the base layer is designated as a non-base layer (enhancement layer).

非基本层(增强层)的图像数据可以是独立于其它层的数据,并且类似于基本层,可仅使用图像数据获得具有与该层的分辨率相同的分辨率的图像。然而,通常,非基本层(增强层)的图像数据是与该层的图像和另一层(例如,比该层低一层的层)的图像之间的差图像对应的数据。在这种情况下,仅使用基本层的图像数据获得具有与基本层的分辨率相同的分辨率的图像,而通过非基本层(增强层)的图像数据和另一层(例如,比该层低一层的层)的图像数据的组合来获得具有与该非基本层(增强层)的分辨率相同的分辨率的图像。这可以抑制层之间的图像数据的冗余。The image data of a non-base layer (enhancement layer) can be data independent of other layers, and similar to the base layer, an image having the same resolution as that of the layer can be obtained using only the image data. However, typically, the image data of a non-base layer (enhancement layer) is data corresponding to a difference image between the image of the layer and the image of another layer (e.g., a layer one layer lower than the layer). In this case, an image having the same resolution as that of the base layer is obtained using only the image data of the base layer, while an image having the same resolution as that of the non-base layer (enhancement layer) is obtained by combining the image data of the non-base layer (enhancement layer) and the image data of another layer (e.g., a layer one layer lower than the layer). This can suppress redundancy in image data between layers.

在上述具有空间分辨率可缩放性的分层图像中,图像的分辨率针对每层而不同。因此,各个层被编码和解码的处理单位的分辨率也不同。因此,如果在各层的编码和解码中共享缩放列表(量化矩阵),则可根据各层的分辨率比率对缩放列表(量化矩阵)进行上转换。In the above-described layered images with spatial resolution scalability, the image resolution varies for each layer. Therefore, the resolution of the processing units used for encoding and decoding each layer also varies. Therefore, if the scaling list (quantization matrix) is shared between encoding and decoding of each layer, it is possible to up-convert the scaling list (quantization matrix) according to the resolution ratio of each layer.

例如,假设基本层的图像具有2K的分辨率(例如,1920×1080),并且非基本层(增强层)的图像具有4K的分辨率(例如,3840×2160)。在这种情况下,例如,基本层的图像(2K图像)的16×16尺寸对应于非基本层的图像(4K图像)的32×32尺寸。根据分辨率比率合适地对缩放列表(量化矩阵)进行上转换。For example, assume that the image of the base layer has a 2K resolution (e.g., 1920×1080) and the image of the non-base layer (enhancement layer) has a 4K resolution (e.g., 3840×2160). In this case, for example, the 16×16 size of the image of the base layer (2K image) corresponds to the 32×32 size of the image of the non-base layer (4K image). The scaling list (quantization matrix) is appropriately up-converted according to the resolution ratio.

例如,用于基本层的量化和去量化的4×4量化矩阵在非基本层的量化和去量化中被上转换为8×8并且被使用。类似地,基本层的8×8缩放列表在非基本层中被上转换为16×16。类似地,在基本层中被上转换为16×16并且使用的量化矩阵在非基本层中被上转换为32×32。For example, a 4×4 quantization matrix used for quantization and dequantization of the base layer is up-converted to 8×8 and used in quantization and dequantization of non-base layers. Similarly, an 8×8 scaling list of the base layer is up-converted to 16×16 in non-base layers. Similarly, a quantization matrix up-converted to 16×16 and used in the base layer is up-converted to 32×32 in non-base layers.

注意,为其提供可缩放性的参数不限于空间分辨率,并且参数的例子可包括时间分辨率(时间可缩放性)。在具有时间分辨率可缩放性的分层图像中,图像的帧速针对每层而不同。其它例子包括:比特深度可缩放性,其中图像数据的比特深度针对每层而不同;和色度可缩放性,其中分量的格式针对每层而不同。Note that the parameters that provide scalability are not limited to spatial resolution, and examples of parameters may include temporal resolution (temporal scalability). In layered images with temporal resolution scalability, the frame rate of the image differs for each layer. Other examples include bit depth scalability, in which the bit depth of the image data differs for each layer; and chroma scalability, in which the format of the component differs for each layer.

其它例子包括SNR可缩放性,其中图像的信噪比(SNR)针对每层而不同。Other examples include SNR scalability, where the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the image is different for each layer.

考虑到图像质量的提高,按照所希望的方式,图像具有的信噪比越低,量化误差越小。为此,在SNR可缩放性中,按照所希望的方式,根据信噪比,不同的缩放列表(非共同缩放列表)被用于各层的量化和去量化。由于这个原因,如上所述,如果缩放列表在层之间被共享,则可发送用于针对基本层的缩放列表中的矩阵元素调整增强层的矩阵元素的偏移值。更具体地,可在逐层的基础上发送指示共同缩放列表和实际使用的缩放列表之差的信息。例如,可在针对每个层的序列参数集(SPS)或图像参数集(PPS)中发送指示该差的信息。指示该差的信息是任意的。例如,该信息可以是具有代表两个缩放列表中的对应元素之间的差值的元素的矩阵,或者可以是指示该差的函数。In view of the improvement of image quality, the lower the signal-to-noise ratio of the image, the smaller the quantization error. To this end, in SNR scalability, different scaling lists (non-common scaling lists) are used for quantization and dequantization of each layer according to the signal-to-noise ratio in a desired manner. For this reason, as described above, if the scaling list is shared between layers, an offset value for adjusting the matrix elements of the enhancement layer for the matrix elements in the scaling list of the base layer may be sent. More specifically, information indicating the difference between the common scaling list and the scaling list actually used may be sent on a layer-by-layer basis. For example, information indicating the difference may be sent in a sequence parameter set (SPS) or a picture parameter set (PPS) for each layer. The information indicating the difference is arbitrary. For example, the information may be a matrix having elements representing the difference between corresponding elements in two scaling lists, or may be a function indicating the difference.

<分层图像编码装置><Layered Image Coding Apparatus>

图50是表示用于执行上述分层图像编码操作的分层图像编码装置的示图。如图50中所示,分层图像编码装置720包括编码单元721、编码单元722和多路复用单元723。50 is a diagram showing a hierarchical image encoding apparatus for performing the above-described hierarchical image encoding operation. As shown in FIG50 , the hierarchical image encoding apparatus 720 includes an encoding unit 721, an encoding unit 722, and a multiplexing unit 723.

编码单元721对基本层的图像进行编码,并且产生编码基本层图像流。编码单元722对非基本层的图像进行编码,并且产生编码非基本层图像流。多路复用单元723多路复用由编码单元721产生的编码基本层图像流和由编码单元722产生的编码非基本层图像流,并且产生编码分层图像流。Coding unit 721 encodes images on the base layer and generates a coded base layer image stream. Coding unit 722 encodes images on non-base layers and generates a coded non-base layer image stream. Multiplexing unit 723 multiplexes the coded base layer image stream generated by coding unit 721 and the coded non-base layer image stream generated by coding unit 722 and generates a coded layered image stream.

图像编码装置10(图14)可以被用于分层图像编码装置720的编码单元721和编码单元722中的每一个。也就是说,可以抑制每个层的编码中的缩放列表的编码量的增加,并且可以抑制每个层的图像质量的降低。另外,编码单元721和编码单元722可以使用相同的标记或参数(也就是说,标记和参数可以被共享)来执行处理(诸如,量化和去量化)。因此,可以抑制编码效率的降低。The image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) can be used for each of the encoding units 721 and 722 of the layered image encoding device 720 . That is, an increase in the amount of code required for scaling lists in encoding each layer can be suppressed, and a decrease in image quality for each layer can be suppressed. Furthermore, the encoding units 721 and 722 can perform processing (such as quantization and dequantization) using the same flags or parameters (that is, the flags and parameters can be shared). Therefore, a decrease in encoding efficiency can be suppressed.

<分层图像解码装置><Layered Image Decoding Device>

图51是表示用于执行上述分层图像解码操作的分层图像解码装置的示图。如图51中所示,分层图像解码装置730包括多路解复用单元731、解码单元732和解码单元733。51 is a diagram showing a layered image decoding apparatus for performing the above-described layered image decoding operation. As shown in FIG51 , the layered image decoding apparatus 730 includes a demultiplexing unit 731 , a decoding unit 732 , and a decoding unit 733 .

多路解复用单元731对已多路复用编码基本层图像流和编码非基本层图像流的编码分层图像流进行多路解复用,并且提取编码基本层图像流和编码非基本层图像流。解码单元732对由多路解复用单元731提取的编码基本层图像流进行解码,并且获得基本层的图像。解码单元733对由多路解复用单元731提取的编码非基本层图像流进行解码,并且获得非基本层的图像。Demultiplexing unit 731 demultiplexes the coded layer image stream, which is multiplexed with the coded base layer image stream and the coded non-base layer image stream, and extracts the coded base layer image stream and the coded non-base layer image stream. Decoding unit 732 decodes the coded base layer image stream extracted by demultiplexing unit 731 and obtains the base layer image. Decoding unit 733 decodes the coded non-base layer image stream extracted by demultiplexing unit 731 and obtains the non-base layer image.

图像解码装置300(图22)可以被用于分层图像解码装置730的解码单元732和解码单元733中的每一个。也就是说,可以抑制每个层的解码中的缩放列表的编码量的增加,并且可以抑制每个层的图像质量的降低。另外,解码单元712和解码单元713可以使用相同的标记或参数(也就是说,标记和参数可以被共享)来执行处理(诸如,量化和去量化)。因此,可以抑制编码效率的降低。The image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) can be used in each of the decoding units 732 and 733 of the layered image decoding device 730 . That is, an increase in the amount of code required for scaling lists during decoding of each layer can be suppressed, and a decrease in image quality for each layer can be suppressed. Furthermore, the decoding units 712 and 713 can perform processing (such as quantization and dequantization) using the same flags or parameters (that is, the flags and parameters can be shared). Consequently, a decrease in coding efficiency can be suppressed.

<9.第九实施例><9. Ninth embodiment>

<计算机><Computer>

上述一系列处理可以由硬件执行,或者也可以由软件执行。在这种情况下,所述一系列处理可被实现为例如图52中示出的计算机。The above series of processing can be executed by hardware or by software. In this case, the series of processing can be implemented as a computer as shown in Figure 52, for example.

在图52中,计算机800中的CPU(中央处理单元)801根据存储在ROM(只读存储器)802中的程序或从存储单元813加载到RAM(随机存取存储器)803中的程序执行各种处理操作。RAM 803还根据需要存储CPU 801执行各种处理操作所需的数据等。52 , a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 801 in a computer 800 executes various processing operations according to a program stored in a ROM (Read Only Memory) 802 or a program loaded from a storage unit 813 into a RAM (Random Access Memory) 803. The RAM 803 also stores data and the like required for the CPU 801 to execute various processing operations as needed.

CPU 801、ROM 802和RAM 803经由总线804彼此连接。输入/输出接口810也连接到总线804。The CPU 801, the ROM 802, and the RAM 803 are connected to one another via a bus 804. An input/output interface 810 is also connected to the bus 804.

输入/输出接口810连接到输入单元811、输出单元812、存储单元813和通信单元814。输入单元811包括键盘、鼠标、接触面板、输入终端等。输出单元812包括期望的输出装置(诸如,扬声器和显示器,显示器包括CRT(阴极射线管)、LCD(液晶显示器)和OELD(有机电致发光显示器))、输出终端等。存储单元813包括:期望的存储介质,诸如硬盘或闪存;和控制单元,控制存储介质的输入和输出。通信单元814包括期望的有线或无线通信装置,诸如调制解调器、LAN接口、USB(通用串行总线)装置和Bluetooth(蓝牙,注册商标)装置。通信单元814经由网络(包括例如因特网)与其它通信装置执行通信处理。The input/output interface 810 is connected to an input unit 811, an output unit 812, a storage unit 813, and a communication unit 814. The input unit 811 includes a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, an input terminal, and the like. The output unit 812 includes desired output devices (such as speakers and displays, the displays including CRT (cathode ray tube), LCD (liquid crystal display), and OELD (organic electroluminescent display)), output terminals, and the like. The storage unit 813 includes: a desired storage medium, such as a hard disk or a flash memory; and a control unit that controls the input and output of the storage medium. The communication unit 814 includes desired wired or wireless communication devices, such as a modem, a LAN interface, a USB (universal serial bus) device, and a Bluetooth (registered trademark) device. The communication unit 814 performs communication processing with other communication devices via a network (including, for example, the Internet).

如果需要,驱动器815也连接到输入/输出接口810。可移动介质821(诸如,磁盘、光盘、磁光盘或半导体存储器)根据需要被放置在驱动器815中。驱动器815根据例如CPU 801的控制从放置在它里面的可移动介质821读取计算机程序、数据等。读取的数据和计算机程序被提供给例如RAM 803。如果需要,从可移动介质821读取的计算机程序被进一步安装到存储单元813中。If necessary, a drive 815 is also connected to the input/output interface 810. A removable medium 821 (such as a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a magneto-optical disk, or a semiconductor memory) is placed in the drive 815 as needed. The drive 815 reads computer programs, data, and the like from the removable medium 821 placed therein according to, for example, the control of the CPU 801. The read data and computer program are provided to, for example, the RAM 803. If necessary, the computer program read from the removable medium 821 is further installed in the storage unit 813.

当上述一系列处理由软件执行时,从网络或记录介质安装构成该软件的程序。When the above-described series of processes is executed by software, a program constituting the software is installed from a network or a recording medium.

如图52中所示,记录介质的例子包括:可移动介质821,其与装置体分开地分发以将程序提供给用户,诸如记录有程序的磁盘(包括软盘)、光盘(包括CD-ROM(压缩盘-只读存储器)和DVD(数字通用盘))、磁光盘(包括MD(迷你盘))或半导体存储器。记录介质的其它例子包括以预先被包括在装置体中的方式分发给用户的装置,诸如记录有程序的ROM 802和存储单元813中所包括的硬盘。As shown in FIG52 , examples of recording media include removable media 821 that are distributed separately from the device body to provide the program to the user, such as a magnetic disk (including a floppy disk), an optical disk (including a CD-ROM (Compact Disc - Read Only Memory) and a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc)), a magneto-optical disk (including an MD (Mini Disc)), or a semiconductor memory having the program recorded thereon. Other examples of recording media include devices that are distributed to the user in a manner previously included in the device body, such as a ROM 802 having the program recorded thereon and a hard disk included in the storage unit 813.

注意,计算机800执行的程序可以是以这里描述的次序按照时间顺序方式执行处理操作的程序,或者可以是并行地或在需要的定时(诸如,当被调用时)执行处理操作的程序。Note that the program executed by the computer 800 may be a program that performs processing operations in a time-series manner in the order described herein, or may be a program that performs processing operations in parallel or at necessary timing such as when called.

另外,如这里所使用,描述存储在记录介质中的程序的步骤当然包括以描述的次序按照时间顺序方式执行的处理操作和并行地或单独地执行(而并不一定按照时间顺序方式执行)的处理操作。In addition, as used herein, steps describing a program stored in a recording medium naturally include processing operations performed in a time-series manner in the order described and processing operations performed in parallel or individually (and not necessarily in a time-series manner).

另外,如这里所使用,术语“系统”表示一组的组成元件(装置、模块(部件)等),而不管是否所有组成元件被容纳在同一壳体中。因此,被容纳在不同壳体中并且经由网络连接的多个装置和包括被容纳在单个壳体中的多个模块的单个装置被定义为系统。In addition, as used herein, the term "system" refers to a group of constituent elements (devices, modules (components), etc.), regardless of whether all constituent elements are housed in the same housing. Therefore, a plurality of devices housed in different housings and connected via a network and a single device including a plurality of modules housed in a single housing are defined as a system.

另外,以上描述为单个装置(或处理单元)的配置可被划分为多个装置(或处理单元)。相反地,以上描述为多个装置(或处理单元)的配置可被组合为单个装置(或处理单元)。另外,当然,除上述配置之外的配置可被添加到每个装置(或每个处理单元)的配置。另外,如果就整个系统而言装置(或处理单元)具有基本上相同的配置和/或操作,则某一装置(或处理单元)的配置的一部分可被包括在另一装置(或另一处理单元)的配置中。换句话说,本技术的实施例不限于前面的实施例,并且在不脱离本技术的范围的情况下可以做出各种修改。In addition, the configuration described above as a single device (or processing unit) may be divided into multiple devices (or processing units). Conversely, the configuration described above as multiple devices (or processing units) may be combined into a single device (or processing unit). In addition, of course, configurations other than the above configurations may be added to the configuration of each device (or each processing unit). In addition, if the devices (or processing units) have substantially the same configuration and/or operation with respect to the entire system, a portion of the configuration of a certain device (or processing unit) may be included in the configuration of another device (or another processing unit). In other words, the embodiments of the present technology are not limited to the previous embodiments, and various modifications may be made without departing from the scope of the present technology.

尽管已参照附图详细描述了本公开内容的优选实施例,但本公开内容的技术范围不限于这里公开的例子。明显的是,具有本公开内容的技术领域中的常识的人能够在不脱离如权利要求中所定义的技术概念的范围的情况下实现各种变化或修改,并且应该理解,这种变化或修改自然也落在本公开内容的技术范围内。Although the preferred embodiments of the present disclosure have been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the technical scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the examples disclosed herein. It is obvious that a person having common sense in the technical field of the present disclosure can implement various changes or modifications without departing from the scope of the technical concept defined in the claims, and it should be understood that such changes or modifications naturally also fall within the technical scope of the present disclosure.

例如,可利用多个装置经由网络共享并且协作以处理单个功能的云计算配置来实现本技术。For example, the present technology may be implemented using a cloud computing configuration in which a plurality of devices are shared via a network and cooperate to process a single function.

另外,上述流程图中示出的每个步骤可由单个装置执行或由多个装置以共享方式执行。In addition, each step shown in the above flowchart may be performed by a single device or performed by a plurality of devices in a shared manner.

另外,如果单个步骤包括多个处理,则所述单个步骤中所包括的所述多个处理可由单个装置执行或由多个装置以共享方式执行。In addition, if a single step includes a plurality of processes, the plurality of processes included in the single step may be performed by a single device or performed by a plurality of devices in a shared manner.

根据前面的实施例的图像编码装置10(图14)和图像解码装置300(图22)可被应用于各种电子装备,诸如用于经由卫星广播、有线广播(诸如,有线TV)或因特网传送数据或者用于经由蜂窝通信将数据传送给终端或从终端传送数据的发射器或接收器、将图像记录在介质(诸如,光盘、磁盘和闪存)上的记录设备和从这种存储介质再现图像的再现设备。将在以下描述四个示例性应用。The image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) and the image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) according to the aforementioned embodiments can be applied to various electronic devices, such as transmitters or receivers for transmitting data via satellite broadcasting, cable broadcasting (such as cable TV), or the Internet, or for transmitting data to or from a terminal via cellular communication, recording devices for recording images on media (such as optical disks, magnetic disks, and flash memory), and reproduction devices for reproducing images from such storage media. Four exemplary applications will be described below.

<10.示例应用><10. Sample Application>

<第一示例应用:电视接收器><First Example Application: Television Receiver>

图53表示应用前面的实施例的电视设备的示意性配置的例子。电视设备900包括天线901、调谐器902、多路解复用器903、解码器904、视频信号处理单元905、显示单元906、音频信号处理单元907、扬声器908、外部接口909、控制单元910、用户接口911和总线912。53 shows an example of a schematic configuration of a television apparatus to which the foregoing embodiment is applied. A television apparatus 900 includes an antenna 901, a tuner 902, a demultiplexer 903, a decoder 904, a video signal processing unit 905, a display unit 906, an audio signal processing unit 907, a speaker 908, an external interface 909, a control unit 910, a user interface 911, and a bus 912.

调谐器902从经由天线901接收的广播信号提取期望频道中的信号,并且解调提取的信号。然后,调谐器902将通过解调获得的编码比特流输出到多路解复用器903。换句话说,调谐器902在用于接收包括编码图像的编码流的电视设备900中用作发送单元。The tuner 902 extracts a signal in a desired channel from a broadcast signal received via the antenna 901 and demodulates the extracted signal. The tuner 902 then outputs a coded bit stream obtained by demodulation to the demultiplexer 903. In other words, the tuner 902 functions as a transmitting unit in the television apparatus 900 for receiving a coded stream including coded images.

多路解复用器903将编码比特流多路解复用为将要观看的节目的视频流和音频流,并且将多路解复用的流输出到解码器904。多路解复用器903还从编码比特流提取辅助数据(诸如,EPG(电子节目指南)),并且将提取的数据提供给控制单元910。注意,如果编码比特流已被加扰,则多路解复用器903还可对编码比特流进行解扰。The demultiplexer 903 demultiplexes the encoded bit stream into a video stream and an audio stream of a program to be viewed, and outputs the demultiplexed streams to the decoder 904. The demultiplexer 903 also extracts auxiliary data such as an EPG (Electronic Program Guide) from the encoded bit stream, and supplies the extracted data to the control unit 910. Note that if the encoded bit stream has been scrambled, the demultiplexer 903 can also descramble the encoded bit stream.

解码器904对从多路解复用器903输入的视频流和音频流进行解码。然后,解码器904将通过解码处理产生的视频数据输出到视频信号处理单元905。解码器904还将通过解码处理产生的音频数据输出到音频信号处理单元907。The decoder 904 decodes the video stream and audio stream input from the demultiplexer 903. The decoder 904 then outputs video data generated by the decoding process to the video signal processing unit 905. The decoder 904 also outputs audio data generated by the decoding process to the audio signal processing unit 907.

视频信号处理单元905再现从解码器904输入的视频数据,并且使视频被显示在显示单元906上。视频信号处理单元905还可使经由网络提供的应用画面被显示在显示单元906上。视频信号处理单元905还可根据设置对视频数据执行其它处理,诸如噪声去除。另外,视频信号处理单元905还可产生GUI(图形用户界面)图像(诸如,菜单、按钮或光标),并且将产生的图像叠加在输出图像上。The video signal processing unit 905 reproduces the video data input from the decoder 904 and displays the video on the display unit 906. The video signal processing unit 905 may also display an application screen provided via a network on the display unit 906. The video signal processing unit 905 may also perform other processing on the video data, such as noise removal, according to the settings. In addition, the video signal processing unit 905 may also generate a GUI (Graphical User Interface) image (such as a menu, button, or cursor) and superimpose the generated image on the output image.

显示单元906由从视频信号处理单元905提供的驱动信号驱动,并且在显示装置(诸如,液晶显示器、等离子体显示器或OELD(有机电致发光显示器)(有机EL显示器))的视频表面上显示视频或图像。The display unit 906 is driven by a driving signal supplied from the video signal processing unit 905 and displays a video or image on a video surface of a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, or an OELD (organic electroluminescent display) (organic EL display).

音频信号处理单元907对从解码器904输入的音频数据执行再现处理(诸如,D/A转换和放大),并且使音频被从扬声器908输出。音频信号处理单元907还可对音频数据执行其它处理,诸如噪声去除。The audio signal processing unit 907 performs reproduction processing such as D/A conversion and amplification on the audio data input from the decoder 904, and causes audio to be output from the speaker 908. The audio signal processing unit 907 may also perform other processing such as noise removal on the audio data.

外部接口909是用于将电视设备900连接到外部装置或网络的接口。例如,经由外部接口909接收的视频流或音频流可由解码器904解码。换句话说,外部接口909也在用于接收包括编码图像的编码流的电视设备900中用作发送单元。The external interface 909 is an interface for connecting the television apparatus 900 to an external device or a network. For example, a video stream or an audio stream received via the external interface 909 can be decoded by the decoder 904. In other words, the external interface 909 also serves as a transmission unit in the television apparatus 900 for receiving an encoded stream including an encoded image.

控制单元910包括处理器(诸如,CPU)和存储器(诸如,RAM和ROM)。存储器存储将要由CPU执行的程序、节目数据、EPG数据、经由网络获取的数据等。当例如电视设备900启动时,存储在存储器中的程序由CPU读取并且执行。CPU根据例如从用户接口911输入的操作信号执行程序以控制电视设备900的操作。The control unit 910 includes a processor (such as a CPU) and a memory (such as a RAM and a ROM). The memory stores programs to be executed by the CPU, program data, EPG data, data obtained via a network, etc. When, for example, the television device 900 is started, the program stored in the memory is read and executed by the CPU. The CPU executes the program to control the operation of the television device 900 according to an operation signal input from, for example, the user interface 911.

用户接口911连接到控制单元910。用户接口911包括例如用于允许用户操作电视设备900的按钮和开关、用于遥控信号的接收单元等。用户接口911检测用户经由上述部件的操作以产生操作信号,并且将产生的操作信号输出到控制单元910。The user interface 911 is connected to the control unit 910. The user interface 911 includes, for example, buttons and switches for allowing the user to operate the television device 900, a receiving unit for remote control signals, etc. The user interface 911 detects the user's operation via the above components to generate an operation signal, and outputs the generated operation signal to the control unit 910.

总线912用于将调谐器902、多路解复用器903、解码器904、视频信号处理单元905、音频信号处理单元907、外部接口909和控制单元910彼此连接。The bus 912 is for connecting the tuner 902 , the demultiplexer 903 , the decoder 904 , the video signal processing unit 905 , the audio signal processing unit 907 , the external interface 909 , and the control unit 910 to one another.

在具有上述配置的电视设备900中,解码器904具有根据前面的实施例的图像解码装置300(图22)的功能。因此,电视设备900可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。In the television device 900 having the above configuration, the decoder 904 has the function of the image decoding apparatus 300 ( FIG. 22 ) according to the previous embodiment. Therefore, the television device 900 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<第二示例应用:移动电话><Second Example Application: Mobile Phone>

图54表示应用前面的实施例的移动电话的示意性配置的例子。移动电话920包括天线921、通信单元922、音频编解码器923、扬声器924、麦克风925、相机单元926、图像处理单元927、多路复用/多路解复用单元928、记录/再现单元929、显示单元930、控制单元931、操作单元932和总线933。54 shows an example of a schematic configuration of a mobile phone to which the foregoing embodiment is applied. The mobile phone 920 includes an antenna 921, a communication unit 922, an audio codec 923, a speaker 924, a microphone 925, a camera unit 926, an image processing unit 927, a multiplexing/demultiplexing unit 928, a recording/reproducing unit 929, a display unit 930, a control unit 931, an operation unit 932, and a bus 933.

天线921连接到通信单元922。扬声器924和麦克风925连接到音频编解码器923。操作单元932连接到控制单元931。总线933用于将通信单元922、音频编码解码器923、相机单元926、图像处理单元927、多路复用/多路解复用单元928、记录/再现单元929、显示单元930和控制单元931彼此连接。The antenna 921 is connected to the communication unit 922. The speaker 924 and the microphone 925 are connected to the audio codec 923. The operation unit 932 is connected to the control unit 931. The bus 933 is used to connect the communication unit 922, the audio codec 923, the camera unit 926, the image processing unit 927, the multiplexing/demultiplexing unit 928, the recording/reproducing unit 929, the display unit 930, and the control unit 931 to each other.

移动电话920在各种操作模式下执行操作,诸如发送和接收音频信号、发送和接收电子邮件或图像数据、拍摄图像和记录数据,所述各种操作模式包括语音呼叫模式、数据通信模式、图像拍摄模式和视频电话模式。The mobile phone 920 performs operations in various operation modes including a voice call mode, a data communication mode, an image capturing mode, and a video call mode, such as sending and receiving audio signals, sending and receiving emails or image data, capturing images, and recording data.

在语音呼叫模式下,由麦克风925产生的模拟音频信号被提供给音频编解码器923。音频编解码器923将模拟音频信号转换成音频数据,并且对转换的音频数据执行A/D转换和压缩。音频编解码器923随后将压缩音频数据输出到通信单元922。通信单元922对音频数据进行编码和调制,并且产生发送信号。通信单元922随后经由天线921将产生的发送信号发送给基站(未示出)。另外,通信单元922放大经由天线921接收的无线电信号,并且对放大的信号执行频率转换以获取接收信号。然后,通信单元922对接收信号进行解调和解码以产生音频数据,并且将产生的音频数据输出到音频编解码器923。音频编解码器923缩放音频数据并且执行D/A转换以产生模拟音频信号。音频编解码器923随后将产生的音频信号提供给扬声器924以使得输出音频。In voice call mode, the analog audio signal generated by the microphone 925 is provided to the audio codec 923. The audio codec 923 converts the analog audio signal into audio data and performs A/D conversion and compression on the converted audio data. The audio codec 923 then outputs the compressed audio data to the communication unit 922. The communication unit 922 encodes and modulates the audio data and generates a transmission signal. The communication unit 922 then transmits the generated transmission signal to a base station (not shown) via the antenna 921. In addition, the communication unit 922 amplifies the radio signal received via the antenna 921 and performs frequency conversion on the amplified signal to obtain a received signal. The communication unit 922 then demodulates and decodes the received signal to generate audio data and outputs the generated audio data to the audio codec 923. The audio codec 923 scales the audio data and performs D/A conversion to generate an analog audio signal. The audio codec 923 then provides the generated audio signal to the speaker 924 so that audio is output.

另外,在数据通信模式下,例如,控制单元931根据用户经由操作单元932的操作产生形成电子邮件的文本数据。另外,控制单元931使文本被显示在显示单元930上。控制单元931还根据经由操作单元932从用户给出的发送指令产生电子邮件数据,并且将产生的电子邮件数据输出到通信单元922。通信单元922对电子邮件数据进行编码和调制以产生发送信号。然后,通信单元922经由天线921将产生的发送信号发送给基站(未示出)。另外,通信单元922放大经由天线921接收的无线电信号,并且对放大的信号执行频率转换以获取接收信号。然后,通信单元922对接收信号进行解调和解码以恢复电子邮件数据,并且将恢复的电子邮件数据输出到控制单元931。控制单元931使电子邮件的内容被显示在显示单元930上,并且还使电子邮件数据被存储在记录/再现单元929的存储介质中。In data communication mode, for example, the control unit 931 generates text data forming an email based on a user operation via the operation unit 932. Furthermore, the control unit 931 causes the text to be displayed on the display unit 930. Furthermore, the control unit 931 generates email data based on a transmission instruction given by the user via the operation unit 932, and outputs the generated email data to the communication unit 922. The communication unit 922 encodes and modulates the email data to generate a transmission signal. The communication unit 922 then transmits the generated transmission signal to a base station (not shown) via the antenna 921. Furthermore, the communication unit 922 amplifies the radio signal received via the antenna 921 and performs frequency conversion on the amplified signal to obtain a received signal. The communication unit 922 then demodulates and decodes the received signal to recover the email data, and outputs the recovered email data to the control unit 931. The control unit 931 causes the content of the email to be displayed on the display unit 930, and also causes the email data to be stored in the storage medium of the recording/reproducing unit 929.

记录/再现单元929包括期望的可读/可写存储介质。存储介质可以是例如内置存储介质(诸如,RAM或闪存)或者外部存储介质(诸如,硬盘、磁盘、磁光盘、光盘、USB存储器或存储卡)。The recording/reproducing unit 929 includes a desired readable/writable storage medium. The storage medium may be, for example, a built-in storage medium such as RAM or flash memory or an external storage medium such as a hard disk, a magnetic disk, a magneto-optical disk, an optical disk, a USB memory, or a memory card.

另外,在图像拍摄模式下,例如,相机单元926拍摄物体的图像以产生图像数据,并且将产生的图像数据输出到图像处理单元927。图像处理单元927对从拍摄单元926输入的图像数据进行编码,并且使编码流被存储在记录/再现单元929的存储介质中。In addition, in the image capturing mode, for example, the camera unit 926 captures an image of an object to generate image data, and outputs the generated image data to the image processing unit 927. The image processing unit 927 encodes the image data input from the capturing unit 926 and causes the encoded stream to be stored in the storage medium of the recording/reproducing unit 929.

另外,在视频电话模式下,例如,多路复用/多路解复用单元928多路复用由图像处理单元927编码的视频流和从音频编码解码器923输入的音频流,并且将多路复用流输出到通信单元922。通信单元922对多路复用流进行编码和调制以产生发送信号。然后,通信单元922经由天线921将产生的发送信号发送给基站(未示出)。通信单元922还放大经由天线921接收的无线电信号,并且对放大的信号执行频率转换以获取接收信号。发送信号和接收信号可包括编码比特流。通信单元922对接收信号进行解调和解码以恢复流,并且将恢复的流输出到多路复用/多路解复用单元928。然后,多路复用/多路解复用单元928将输入流多路解复用为视频流和音频流,并且将视频流和音频流分别输出到图像处理单元927和音频编码解码器923。图像处理单元927对视频流进行解码以产生视频数据。视频数据被提供给显示单元930,并且一系列图像由显示单元930显示。音频编解码器923扩展音频流并且执行D/A转换以产生模拟音频信号。音频编解码器923随后将产生的音频信号提供给扬声器924以使得输出音频。In addition, in videophone mode, for example, the multiplexing/demultiplexing unit 928 multiplexes the video stream encoded by the image processing unit 927 and the audio stream input from the audio codec 923, and outputs the multiplexed stream to the communication unit 922. The communication unit 922 encodes and modulates the multiplexed stream to generate a transmission signal. The communication unit 922 then transmits the generated transmission signal to a base station (not shown) via the antenna 921. The communication unit 922 also amplifies the radio signal received via the antenna 921 and performs frequency conversion on the amplified signal to obtain a received signal. The transmission signal and the received signal may include an encoded bit stream. The communication unit 922 demodulates and decodes the received signal to restore the stream and outputs the restored stream to the multiplexing/demultiplexing unit 928. The multiplexing/demultiplexing unit 928 then demultiplexes the input stream into a video stream and an audio stream, and outputs the video stream and the audio stream to the image processing unit 927 and the audio codec 923, respectively. The image processing unit 927 decodes the video stream to generate video data. The video data is provided to the display unit 930, and a series of images are displayed by the display unit 930. The audio codec 923 expands the audio stream and performs D/A conversion to generate an analog audio signal. The audio codec 923 then provides the generated audio signal to the speaker 924 so that the audio is output.

在具有上述配置的移动电话920中,图像处理单元927具有根据前面的实施例的图像编码装置10(图14)的功能和图像解码装置300(图22)的功能。因此,移动电话920可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。In the mobile phone 920 having the above configuration, the image processing unit 927 has the functions of the image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) and the image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) according to the previous embodiment. Therefore, the mobile phone 920 can suppress an increase in the amount of code for the scaling list.

另外,尽管已给出对例如移动电话920的描述,但类似于移动电话920,应用本技术的图像编码装置和图像解码装置可被用于具有与移动电话920的成像功能和通信功能类似的成像功能和通信功能的任何设备,诸如PDA(个人数字助手)、智能电话、UMPC(超移动个人计算机)上网本或笔记本个人计算机。In addition, although a description has been given of, for example, a mobile phone 920, similar to the mobile phone 920, the image encoding device and the image decoding device to which the present technology is applied can be used for any device having imaging functions and communication functions similar to those of the mobile phone 920, such as a PDA (personal digital assistant), a smart phone, a UMPC (ultra mobile personal computer), a netbook, or a notebook personal computer.

<第三示例应用:记录/再现设备><Third Example Application: Recording/Reproducing Device>

图55表示应用前面的实施例的记录/再现设备的示意性配置的例子。记录/再现设备940对例如接收的广播节目的音频数据和视频数据进行编码,并且将编码音频数据和视频数据记录在记录介质上。另外,记录/再现设备940还可对从例如另一设备获取的音频数据和视频数据进行编码,并且将编码音频数据和视频数据记录在记录介质上。此外,记录/再现设备940根据从用户给出的指令使用监视器和扬声器再现例如记录在记录介质上的数据。在这种情况下,记录/再现设备940对音频数据和视频数据进行解码。FIG55 shows an example of a schematic configuration of a recording/reproducing device to which the preceding embodiments are applied. The recording/reproducing device 940 encodes, for example, audio data and video data of a received broadcast program and records the encoded audio data and video data on a recording medium. Alternatively, the recording/reproducing device 940 can also encode audio data and video data obtained from, for example, another device and record the encoded audio data and video data on a recording medium. Furthermore, the recording/reproducing device 940 reproduces, for example, data recorded on a recording medium using a monitor and speakers in accordance with user instructions. In this case, the recording/reproducing device 940 decodes the audio data and video data.

记录/再现设备940包括调谐器941、外部接口942、编码器943、HDD(硬盘驱动器)944、盘驱动器945、选择器946、解码器947、OSD(屏上显示器)948、控制单元949和用户接口950。The recording/reproducing device 940 includes a tuner 941 , an external interface 942 , an encoder 943 , an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) 944 , a disk drive 945 , a selector 946 , a decoder 947 , an OSD (On Screen Display) 948 , a control unit 949 , and a user interface 950 .

调谐器941从经由天线(未示出)接收的广播信号提取期望频道中的信号,并且解调提取的信号。调谐器941随后将通过解调获得的编码比特流输出到选择器946。换句话说,调谐器941在记录/再现设备940中用作发送单元。The tuner 941 extracts a signal in a desired channel from a broadcast signal received via an antenna (not shown) and demodulates the extracted signal. The tuner 941 then outputs a coded bit stream obtained by demodulation to the selector 946. In other words, the tuner 941 functions as a transmitting unit in the recording/reproducing device 940.

外部接口942是用于将记录/再现设备940连接到外部装置或网络的接口。外部接口942可以是例如IEEE 1394接口、网络接口、USB接口、闪存接口等。例如,经由外部接口942接收的视频数据和音频数据被输入到编码器943。换句话说,外部接口942在记录/再现设备940中用作发送单元。The external interface 942 is an interface for connecting the recording/reproducing apparatus 940 to an external device or a network. The external interface 942 may be, for example, an IEEE 1394 interface, a network interface, a USB interface, a flash memory interface, or the like. For example, video data and audio data received via the external interface 942 are input to the encoder 943. In other words, the external interface 942 functions as a transmission unit in the recording/reproducing apparatus 940.

如果从外部接口942输入的视频数据和音频数据未被编码,则编码器943对从外部接口942输入的视频数据和音频数据进行编码。编码器943随后将编码比特流输出到选择器946。If the video data and the audio data input from the external interface 942 are not encoded, the encoder 943 encodes the video data and the audio data input from the external interface 942. The encoder 943 then outputs the encoded bit stream to the selector 946.

HDD 944将包括压缩内容数据(诸如,视频和音频)的编码比特流、各种程序和其它数据记录在内部硬盘上。另外,当再现视频和音频时,HDD 944从硬盘读取上述数据。The HDD 944 records a coded bit stream including compressed content data such as video and audio, various programs, and other data on an internal hard disk. In addition, when reproducing video and audio, the HDD 944 reads the above data from the hard disk.

盘驱动器945将数据记录在放置在它里面的记录介质上并且从放置在它里面的记录介质读取数据。放置在盘驱动器945中的记录介质可以是例如DVD盘(诸如,DVD-视频、DVD-RAM、DVD-R、DVD-RW、DVD+R或DVD+RW)或Blu-ray(蓝光,注册商标)盘。The disk drive 945 records data on a recording medium placed therein and reads data from the recording medium placed therein. The recording medium placed in the disk drive 945 may be, for example, a DVD disk (such as DVD-Video, DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, or DVD+RW) or a Blu-ray (registered trademark) disk.

当记录视频和音频时,选择器946选择从调谐器941或编码器943输入的编码比特流,并且将选择的编码比特流输出到HDD 944或盘驱动器945。当再现视频和音频时,选择器946将从HDD 944或盘驱动器945输入的编码比特流输出到解码器947。When recording video and audio, the selector 946 selects an encoded bit stream input from the tuner 941 or the encoder 943 and outputs the selected encoded bit stream to the HDD 944 or the disk drive 945. When reproducing video and audio, the selector 946 outputs the encoded bit stream input from the HDD 944 or the disk drive 945 to the decoder 947.

解码器947对编码比特流进行解码以产生视频数据和音频数据。解码器947随后将产生的视频数据输出到OSD 948。解码器904还将产生的音频数据输出到外部扬声器。The decoder 947 decodes the encoded bit stream to generate video data and audio data. The decoder 947 then outputs the generated video data to the OSD 948. The decoder 904 also outputs the generated audio data to an external speaker.

OSD 948再现从解码器947输入的视频数据,并且显示视频。另外,OSD 948还可将GUI图像(诸如,菜单、按钮或光标)叠加在将要显示的视频上。The OSD 948 reproduces the video data input from the decoder 947 and displays the video. In addition, the OSD 948 may also superimpose a GUI image such as a menu, a button, or a cursor on the video to be displayed.

控制单元949包括处理器(诸如,CPU)和存储器(诸如,RAM和ROM)。存储器存储将要由CPU执行的程序、节目数据等。当例如记录/再现设备940启动时,存储在存储器中的程序由CPU读取并且执行。CPU根据例如从用户接口950输入的操作信号执行程序以控制记录/再现设备940的操作。The control unit 949 includes a processor (such as a CPU) and a memory (such as a RAM and a ROM). The memory stores programs to be executed by the CPU, program data, etc. When the recording/reproducing device 940 is started, for example, the program stored in the memory is read and executed by the CPU. The CPU executes the program based on an operation signal input from the user interface 950, for example, to control the operation of the recording/reproducing device 940.

用户接口950连接到控制单元949。用户接口950包括例如用于允许用户操作记录/再现设备940的按钮和开关、用于遥控信号的接收单元等。用户接口950检测用户经由上述部件的操作以产生操作信号,并且将产生的操作信号输出到控制单元949。The user interface 950 is connected to the control unit 949. The user interface 950 includes, for example, buttons and switches for allowing the user to operate the recording/reproducing device 940, a receiving unit for remote control signals, etc. The user interface 950 detects the user's operation via the above components to generate an operation signal, and outputs the generated operation signal to the control unit 949.

在具有上述配置的记录/再现设备940中,编码器943具有根据前面的实施例的图像编码装置10(图14)的功能。另外,解码器947具有根据前面的实施例的图像解码装置300(图22)的功能。因此,记录/再现设备940可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。In the recording/reproducing device 940 having the above configuration, the encoder 943 has the functions of the image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) according to the previous embodiment. Furthermore, the decoder 947 has the functions of the image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) according to the previous embodiment. Therefore, the recording/reproducing device 940 can suppress an increase in the amount of code for the scaling list.

<第四示例应用:成像设备><Fourth Example Application: Imaging Device>

图56表示应用前面的实施例的成像设备的示意性配置的例子。成像设备960拍摄物体的图像以产生图像数据,对图像数据进行编码,并且将编码图像数据记录在记录介质上。Fig. 56 shows an example of a schematic configuration of an imaging device to which the foregoing embodiment is applied. The imaging device 960 captures an image of an object to generate image data, encodes the image data, and records the encoded image data on a recording medium.

成像设备960包括光学块961、成像单元962、信号处理单元963、图像处理单元964、显示单元965、外部接口966、存储器967、介质驱动器968、OSD 969、控制单元970、用户接口971和总线972。The imaging device 960 includes an optical block 961 , an imaging unit 962 , a signal processing unit 963 , an image processing unit 964 , a display unit 965 , an external interface 966 , a memory 967 , a media drive 968 , an OSD 969 , a control unit 970 , a user interface 971 , and a bus 972 .

光学块961连接到成像单元962。成像单元962连接到信号处理单元963。显示单元965连接到图像处理单元964。用户接口971连接到控制单元970。总线972用于将图像处理单元964、外部接口966、存储器967、介质驱动器968、OSD 969和控制单元970彼此连接。The optical block 961 is connected to the imaging unit 962. The imaging unit 962 is connected to the signal processing unit 963. The display unit 965 is connected to the image processing unit 964. The user interface 971 is connected to the control unit 970. The bus 972 is used to connect the image processing unit 964, the external interface 966, the memory 967, the media drive 968, the OSD 969, and the control unit 970 to each other.

光学块961包括聚焦透镜、孔径机构等。光学块961在成像单元962的成像表面上形成物体的光学图像。成像单元962包括图像传感器(诸如,CCD或CMOS图像传感器),并且通过执行光电转换来将形成在成像表面上的光学图像转换成用作电信号的图像信号。成像单元962随后将图像信号输出到信号处理单元963。The optical block 961 includes a focusing lens, an aperture mechanism, and the like. The optical block 961 forms an optical image of an object on an imaging surface of the imaging unit 962. The imaging unit 962 includes an image sensor (such as a CCD or CMOS image sensor) and converts the optical image formed on the imaging surface into an image signal serving as an electrical signal by performing photoelectric conversion. The imaging unit 962 then outputs the image signal to the signal processing unit 963.

信号处理单元963对从成像单元962输入的图像信号执行各种相机信号处理操作,诸如拐点校正、伽马校正和颜色校正。信号处理单元963将经受了相机信号处理操作的图像数据输出到图像处理单元964。The signal processing unit 963 performs various camera signal processing operations such as knee correction, gamma correction, and color correction on the image signal input from the imaging unit 962. The signal processing unit 963 outputs the image data subjected to the camera signal processing operation to the image processing unit 964.

图像处理单元964对从信号处理单元963输入的图像数据进行编码以产生编码数据。图像处理单元964随后将产生的编码数据输出到外部接口966或介质驱动器968。另外,图像处理单元964对从外部接口966或介质驱动器968输入的编码数据进行解码以产生图像数据。图像处理单元964随后将产生的图像数据输出到显示单元965。另外,图像处理单元964还可将从信号处理单元963输入的图像数据输出到显示单元965以使得显示图像。此外,图像处理单元964还可将从OSD 969获取的显示数据叠加在将要被输出到显示单元965的图像上。The image processing unit 964 encodes the image data input from the signal processing unit 963 to generate encoded data. The image processing unit 964 then outputs the generated encoded data to the external interface 966 or the media drive 968. In addition, the image processing unit 964 decodes the encoded data input from the external interface 966 or the media drive 968 to generate image data. The image processing unit 964 then outputs the generated image data to the display unit 965. In addition, the image processing unit 964 can also output the image data input from the signal processing unit 963 to the display unit 965 so that an image is displayed. In addition, the image processing unit 964 can also superimpose display data obtained from the OSD 969 on the image to be output to the display unit 965.

OSD 969产生GUI图像(诸如,菜单、按钮或光标),并且将产生的图像输出到图像处理单元964。The OSD 969 generates a GUI image such as a menu, a button, or a cursor, and outputs the generated image to the image processing unit 964 .

外部接口966被形成为例如USB输入/输出端子。当打印图像时,外部接口966将例如成像设备960连接到打印机。如果需要,驱动器也连接到外部接口966。可移动介质(诸如,磁盘或光盘)被放置在该驱动器中,并且从可移动介质读取的程序可被安装在成像设备960中。另外,外部接口966还可被形成为网络接口以连接到网络(诸如,LAN或因特网)。换句话说,外部接口966在成像设备960中用作发送单元。The external interface 966 is formed as, for example, a USB input/output terminal. When printing an image, the external interface 966 connects the imaging device 960 to a printer, for example. If necessary, a drive is also connected to the external interface 966. A removable medium (such as a magnetic disk or an optical disk) is placed in the drive, and a program read from the removable medium can be installed in the imaging device 960. In addition, the external interface 966 can also be formed as a network interface to connect to a network (such as a LAN or the Internet). In other words, the external interface 966 serves as a sending unit in the imaging device 960.

将要被放置在介质驱动器968中的记录介质可以是例如任何可读/可写的可移动介质,诸如磁盘、磁光盘、光盘或半导体存储器。替代地,记录介质可被固定地连接到介质驱动器968,并且可形成内置硬盘驱动器或非便携式存储单元,诸如SSD(固态驱动器)。The recording medium to be placed in the media drive 968 may be, for example, any readable/writable removable medium such as a magnetic disk, a magneto-optical disk, an optical disk, or a semiconductor memory. Alternatively, the recording medium may be fixedly connected to the media drive 968 and may be formed as a built-in hard disk drive or a non-portable storage unit such as an SSD (Solid State Drive).

控制单元970包括处理器(诸如,CPU)和存储器(诸如,RAM和ROM)。存储器存储将要由CPU执行的程序、节目数据等。当例如成像设备960启动时,存储在存储器中的程序由CPU读取并且执行。CPU根据例如从用户接口971输入的操作信号执行程序以控制成像设备960的操作。The control unit 970 includes a processor (such as a CPU) and a memory (such as a RAM and a ROM). The memory stores programs to be executed by the CPU, program data, etc. When the imaging device 960 is turned on, for example, the program stored in the memory is read and executed by the CPU. The CPU executes the program based on an operation signal input from the user interface 971, for example, to control the operation of the imaging device 960.

用户接口971连接到控制单元970。用户接口971包括例如用于允许用户操作成像设备960的按钮、开关等。用户接口971检测用户经由上述部件的操作以产生操作信号,并且将产生的操作信号输出到控制单元970。The user interface 971 is connected to the control unit 970. The user interface 971 includes, for example, buttons, switches, etc. for allowing the user to operate the imaging device 960. The user interface 971 detects user operations via the above components to generate operation signals and outputs the generated operation signals to the control unit 970.

在具有上述配置的成像设备960中,图像处理单元964具有根据前面的实施例的图像编码装置10(图14)的功能和图像解码装置300(图22)的功能。因此,成像设备960可以抑制缩放列表的编码量的增加。In the imaging device 960 having the above configuration, the image processing unit 964 has the functions of the image encoding device 10 ( FIG. 14 ) and the image decoding device 300 ( FIG. 22 ) according to the previous embodiment. Therefore, the imaging device 960 can suppress an increase in the encoding amount of the scaling list.

<7.可缩放编码的示例应用><7. Example Application of Scalable Coding>

<第一系统><First System>

接下来,将描述已使用可缩放编码(分层(图像)编码)编码的可缩放编码数据的使用的特定例子。可缩放编码可被用于例如待发送的数据的选择,如图57中示出的例子中所示。Next, a specific example of the use of scalable coded data that has been coded using scalable coding (layered (image) coding) will be described. Scalable coding can be used for selection of data to be transmitted, for example, as shown in the example shown in FIG.

在图57中示出的数据发送系统1000中,分发服务器1002读取存储在可缩放编码数据存储单元1001中的可缩放编码数据,并且经由网络1003将可缩放编码数据分发给终端装置(诸如,个人计算机1004、AV装置1005、平板装置1006和移动电话1007)。In the data sending system 1000 shown in Figure 57, the distribution server 1002 reads the scalable coded data stored in the scalable coded data storage unit 1001, and distributes the scalable coded data to terminal devices (such as a personal computer 1004, an AV device 1005, a tablet device 1006, and a mobile phone 1007) via a network 1003.

在这种情况下,分发服务器1002根据终端装置的性能、通信环境等选择具有期望质量的编码数据,并且发送选择的编码数据。即使分发服务器1002发送具有高于需要水平的质量的数据,终端装置也可能并不总是获得高质量图像,并且可能引起延迟或溢出。另外,这种数据可能占用超过需要水平的通信带宽,或者可能增加超过需要水平的终端装置上的负载。相反地,即使分发服务器1002发送具有低于需要水平的质量的数据,终端装置也可能并不一定获得具有足够质量的图像。因此,分发服务器1002根据需要读取存储在可缩放编码数据存储单元1001中的可缩放编码数据作为具有适合终端装置的性能、通信环境等的质量的编码数据,并且发送读取的编码数据。In this case, the distribution server 1002 selects coded data with desired quality based on the performance of the terminal device, the communication environment, etc., and sends the selected coded data. Even if the distribution server 1002 sends data with a quality higher than the required level, the terminal device may not always obtain a high-quality image, and may cause a delay or overflow. In addition, such data may occupy a communication bandwidth exceeding the required level, or may increase the load on the terminal device exceeding the required level. Conversely, even if the distribution server 1002 sends data with a quality lower than the required level, the terminal device may not necessarily obtain an image with sufficient quality. Therefore, the distribution server 1002 reads the scalable coded data stored in the scalable coded data storage unit 1001 as coded data with a quality suitable for the performance of the terminal device, the communication environment, etc., as needed, and sends the read coded data.

例如,假设可缩放编码数据存储单元1001存储已被执行可缩放编码的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011。可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011是包括基本层和增强层的编码数据,并且是被解码以获得基本层的图像和增强层的图像的数据。For example, it is assumed that the scalable coded data storage unit 1001 stores scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 on which scalable coding has been performed. The scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 is coded data including a base layer and an enhancement layer, and is decoded to obtain an image of the base layer and an image of the enhancement layer.

分发服务器1002根据发送数据的终端装置的性能、通信环境等选择合适的层,并且读取该层的数据。例如,分发服务器1002从可缩放编码数据存储单元1001读取高质量可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011,并且将读取的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011按原样发送给具有高处理能力的个人计算机1004或平板装置1006。相比之下,例如,分发服务器1002从可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011提取基本层的数据,并且将提取的基本层的数据发送给具有低处理能力的AV装置1005和移动电话1007作为具有与可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011相同的内容但具有比可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011低的质量的可缩放编码数据(BL)1012。The distribution server 1002 selects an appropriate layer based on the performance of the terminal device transmitting the data, the communication environment, etc., and reads the data of the layer. For example, the distribution server 1002 reads high-quality scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 from the scalable coded data storage unit 1001 and transmits the read scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 as is to the personal computer 1004 or tablet device 1006 having high processing power. In contrast, for example, the distribution server 1002 extracts the data of the base layer from the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 and transmits the extracted base layer data to the AV device 1005 and mobile phone 1007 having low processing power as scalable coded data (BL) 1012 having the same content as the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 but lower quality than the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011.

以这种方式使用可缩放编码数据方便数据量的调整,由此抑制延迟或溢出的发生并且抑制终端装置或通信介质上的负载的不必要的增加。另外,可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011具有减少的层之间的冗余,并且因此与具有单独编码的各层的数据的数据相比具有更少量的数据。因此,可以更高效地使用可缩放编码数据存储单元1001的存储区域。Using scalable coded data in this manner facilitates adjustment of the data volume, thereby suppressing the occurrence of delays or overflows and suppressing unnecessary increases in the load on terminal devices or communication media. Furthermore, the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 has reduced redundancy between layers and therefore has a smaller amount of data than data having data of each layer coded separately. Therefore, the storage area of the scalable coded data storage unit 1001 can be used more efficiently.

注意,由于各种装置(诸如,个人计算机1004、AV装置1005、平板装置1006和移动电话1007)可以被用作终端装置,所以终端装置的硬件性能针对每个装置而不同。另外,由于各种应用可由终端装置执行,所以应用的软件能力可不同。另外,用作通信介质的网络1003可被实现为任何通信线路网络(所述通信线路网络可以是有线通信线路网络、无线通信线路网络或二者,诸如因特网和LAN(局域网)),并且具有各种数据传输能力。这种性能和能力可根据其它通信等而不同。Note that, since various devices (such as personal computer 1004, AV device 1005, tablet device 1006 and mobile phone 1007) can be used as terminal devices, the hardware performance of the terminal device is different for each device. In addition, since various applications can be executed by the terminal device, the software capabilities of the application can be different. In addition, the network 1003 used as a communication medium can be implemented as any communication line network (the communication line network can be a wired communication line network, a wireless communication line network or the two, such as the Internet and a LAN (local area network)), and has various data transmission capabilities. This performance and ability can be different according to other communications, etc.

因此,在数据的发送开始之前,分发服务器1002可与数据将要被发送到的终端装置通信,并且可获得关于终端装置的能力的信息(诸如,终端装置的硬件性能或由终端装置执行的应用(软件)的性能)和关于通信环境的信息(诸如,网络1003的可用带宽)。另外,分发服务器1002可基于获得的信息选择合适的层。Therefore, before data transmission begins, the distribution server 1002 can communicate with the terminal device to which the data is to be transmitted, and can obtain information about the capabilities of the terminal device (such as the hardware performance of the terminal device or the performance of the application (software) executed by the terminal device) and information about the communication environment (such as the available bandwidth of the network 1003). In addition, the distribution server 1002 can select an appropriate layer based on the obtained information.

注意,层可由终端装置提取。例如,个人计算机1004可对发送的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011进行解码,并且显示基本层的图像或增强层的图像。替代地,例如,个人计算机1004可从发送的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1011提取基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1012,存储提取的可缩放编码数据(BL)1012,将提取的可缩放编码数据(BL)1012传送到另一装置,或者对提取的可缩放编码数据(BL)1012进行解码以显示基本层的图像。Note that the layer can be extracted by the terminal device. For example, the personal computer 1004 can decode the transmitted scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011 and display the image of the base layer or the image of the enhancement layer. Alternatively, for example, the personal computer 1004 can extract the scalable coded data (BL) 1012 of the base layer from the transmitted scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1011, store the extracted scalable coded data (BL) 1012, transmit the extracted scalable coded data (BL) 1012 to another device, or decode the extracted scalable coded data (BL) 1012 to display the image of the base layer.

当然,可缩放编码数据存储单元1001的数量、分发服务器1002的数量、网络1003的数量和终端装置的数量是任意的。另外,尽管已给出分发服务器1002将数据发送给终端装置的例子的描述,但使用的例子不限于这个例子。数据发送系统1000可被用在当将已使用可缩放编码编码的编码数据发送给终端装置时根据终端装置的能力、通信环境等选择合适的层的任何系统。Of course, the number of scalable coded data storage units 1001, the number of distribution servers 1002, the number of networks 1003, and the number of terminal devices are arbitrary. Furthermore, while the description has been given of an example in which the distribution server 1002 transmits data to a terminal device, the example used is not limited to this example. The data transmission system 1000 can be used in any system that selects an appropriate layer based on the capabilities of the terminal device, the communication environment, etc. when transmitting coded data encoded using scalable coding to the terminal device.

另外,以类似于以上参照图49至51描述的针对分级编码和分级解码的应用的方式,本技术还可以被应用于上述如图57中所示的数据发送系统1000,由此实现与以上参照图49至51描述的优点类似的优点。In addition, in a manner similar to the application to hierarchical encoding and hierarchical decoding described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51, the present technology can also be applied to the data sending system 1000 shown in the above-mentioned Figure 57, thereby achieving advantages similar to those described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51.

<第二系统><Second System>

例如,如图58中示出的例子中所示,可缩放编码还可被用于经由多个通信介质的传输。For example, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 58 , scalable coding may also be used for transmission via multiple communication media.

在图58中示出的数据发送系统1100中,广播站1101经由地面广播1111发送基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1121。广播站1101还经由期望网络1112(网络1112由通信网络形成,通信网络可以是有线通信网络、无线通信网络或二者)发送(例如,打包和发送)增强层的可缩放编码数据(EL)1122。In the data transmission system 1100 shown in FIG58 , a broadcasting station 1101 transmits scalable coded data (BL) 1121 of a base layer via a terrestrial broadcast 1111. The broadcasting station 1101 also transmits (e.g., packages and transmits) scalable coded data (EL) 1122 of an enhancement layer via a desired network 1112 (the network 1112 is formed of a communication network, which may be a wired communication network, a wireless communication network, or both).

终端装置1102具有从广播站1101接收地面广播1111的功能,并且经地面广播1111接收基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1121。终端装置1102还具有经网络1112执行通信的通信功能,并且接收经由网络1112发送的增强层的可缩放编码数据(EL)1122。The terminal device 1102 has a function of receiving a terrestrial broadcast 1111 from the broadcasting station 1101, and receives scalable coded data (BL) 1121 of a base layer via the terrestrial broadcast 1111. The terminal device 1102 also has a communication function of performing communication via a network 1112, and receives scalable coded data (EL) 1122 of an enhancement layer transmitted via the network 1112.

终端装置1102根据例如用户指令等对经由地面广播1111获取的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1121进行解码以获得基本层的图像,存储可缩放编码数据(BL)1121,或者将可缩放编码数据(BL)1121传送到另一装置。The terminal device 1102 decodes the scalable coded data (BL) 1121 of the base layer obtained via the terrestrial broadcast 1111 according to, for example, user instructions, to obtain an image of the base layer, stores the scalable coded data (BL) 1121, or transmits the scalable coded data (BL) 1121 to another device.

另外,终端装置1102根据例如用户指令等组合经由地面广播1111获取的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1121与经由网络1112获取的增强层的可缩放编码数据(EL)1122以获得可缩放编码数据(BL+EL),并且对可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)进行解码以获得增强层的图像,存储可缩放编码数据(BL+EL),或者将可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)传送到另一装置。In addition, the terminal device 1102 combines the scalable coded data (BL) 1121 of the base layer obtained via the terrestrial broadcast 1111 with the scalable coded data (EL) 1122 of the enhancement layer obtained via the network 1112 according to, for example, a user instruction to obtain scalable coded data (BL+EL), decodes the scalable coded data (BL+EL) to obtain an image of the enhancement layer, stores the scalable coded data (BL+EL), or transmits the scalable coded data (BL+EL) to another device.

如上所述,可以经由例如针对每个层而不同的通信介质传输可缩放编码数据。因此,可以分配负载,并且可以防止发生延迟或溢出。As described above, scalable coded data can be transmitted via, for example, a different communication medium for each layer. Therefore, the load can be distributed and delay or overflow can be prevented from occurring.

此外,可根据情况针对每个层选择将要用于传输的通信介质。例如,可经由具有大带宽的通信介质传输具有相对较大量的数据的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1121,并且可经具有窄带宽的通信介质传输具有相对较小量的数据的增强层的可缩放编码数据(EL)1122。替代地,例如,用于传输增强层的可缩放编码数据(EL)1122的通信介质可根据网络1112的可用带宽在网络1112和地面广播1111之间切换。自然,以上情况类似地应用于任意层的数据。In addition, the communication medium to be used for transmission can be selected for each layer according to the situation. For example, the scalable coded data (BL) 1121 of the base layer having a relatively large amount of data can be transmitted via a communication medium having a large bandwidth, and the scalable coded data (EL) 1122 of the enhancement layer having a relatively small amount of data can be transmitted via a communication medium having a narrow bandwidth. Alternatively, for example, the communication medium for transmitting the scalable coded data (EL) 1122 of the enhancement layer can be switched between the network 1112 and the terrestrial broadcast 1111 according to the available bandwidth of the network 1112. Naturally, the above situation is similarly applied to the data of any layer.

以上述方式进行的控制可以进一步抑制数据传输的负载的增加。Control performed in the above-described manner can further suppress an increase in the load of data transmission.

当然,层的数量是任意的,并且用于传输的通信介质的数量也是任意的。另外,数据将要被分发到的终端装置1102的数量也是任意的。另外,尽管已作为例子在从广播站1101广播的情况下给出描述,但使用的例子不限于这个例子。数据发送系统1100可被用在以层为单位将使用可缩放编码编码的数据划分为多个段并且经多个线路传输数据段的任何系统中。Of course, the number of layers is arbitrary, and the number of communication media used for transmission is also arbitrary. Furthermore, the number of terminal devices 1102 to which data is to be distributed is also arbitrary. Furthermore, while the description has been given using the example of broadcasting from broadcast station 1101, the example used is not limited to this. The data transmission system 1100 can be used in any system that divides data encoded using scalable coding into multiple segments in layers and transmits the data segments over multiple lines.

另外,以类似于以上参照图49至51描述的针对分级编码和分级解码的应用的方式,本技术还可以被应用于上述如图58中所示的数据发送系统1100,由此实现与以上参照图49至51描述的优点类似的优点。In addition, in a manner similar to the application to hierarchical encoding and hierarchical decoding described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51, the present technology can also be applied to the data sending system 1100 shown in the above-mentioned Figure 58, thereby achieving advantages similar to those described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51.

<第三系统><Third System>

例如,如图59中示出的例子中所示,可缩放编码还可被用于编码数据的存储。For example, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 59 , scalable coding may also be used for storage of encoded data.

在图59中示出的成像系统1200中,成像设备1201对通过拍摄物体1211的图像而获得的图像数据执行可缩放编码,并且将所获得的数据提供给可缩放编码数据存储装置1202作为可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221。In the imaging system 1200 shown in Figure 59, the imaging device 1201 performs scalable coding on image data obtained by capturing an image of an object 1211, and provides the obtained data to the scalable coded data storage device 1202 as scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221.

可缩放编码数据存储装置1202以与情况对应的质量存储从成像设备1201提供的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221。例如,在通常时间中,可缩放编码数据存储装置1202从可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221提取基本层的数,并且存储提取的基本层的数据作为具有低质量和少量数据的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1222。相比之下,例如,在关注时间中,可缩放编码数据存储装置1202按原样存储具有高质量和大量数据的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221。The scalable coded data storage device 1202 stores the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221 supplied from the imaging device 1201 at a quality appropriate to the situation. For example, during normal time, the scalable coded data storage device 1202 extracts the data of the base layer from the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221 and stores the extracted data of the base layer as scalable coded data (BL) 1222 of the base layer having low quality and a small amount of data. In contrast, during a time of interest, for example, the scalable coded data storage device 1202 stores the scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221 having high quality and a large amount of data as is.

因此,可缩放编码数据存储装置1202可以仅在必要时以高质量保存图像。这可以在抑制由于质量的降低导致的图像的价值的降低的同时抑制数据量的增加,并且可以提高存储区域的使用效率。Therefore, the scalable coded data storage device 1202 can store images with high quality only when necessary. This can suppress the increase in data volume while suppressing the decrease in the value of the image due to the decrease in quality, and can improve the use efficiency of the storage area.

例如,假设成像设备1201是安全相机。如果待监视的物体(例如,侵入者)未出现在拍摄图像中(通常时间),则拍摄图像可能不具有重要的内容。因此,优先考虑数据量的减少,并且图像的图像数据(可缩放编码数据)被以低质量存储。相比之下,如果待监视的物体作为物体1211出现在拍摄图像中(关注时间),则拍摄图像可能具有重要的内容。因此,优先考虑图像质量,并且图像的图像数据(可缩放编码数据)被以高质量存储。For example, assume that imaging device 1201 is a security camera. If the object to be monitored (e.g., an intruder) does not appear in the captured image (normal time), the captured image may not have important content. Therefore, priority is given to reducing the amount of data, and the image data (scalable coded data) of the image is stored at low quality. In contrast, if the object to be monitored appears as object 1211 in the captured image (attention time), the captured image may have important content. Therefore, priority is given to image quality, and the image data (scalable coded data) of the image is stored at high quality.

注意,通常时间或关注时间可由例如可缩放编码数据存储装置1202通过分析图像来确定。替代地,成像设备1201可确定通常时间或关注时间,并且可将确定结果发送给可缩放编码数据存储装置1202。Note that the normal time or the attention time may be determined by analyzing an image, for example, by the scalable coded data storage device 1202. Alternatively, the imaging device 1201 may determine the normal time or the attention time and may send the determination result to the scalable coded data storage device 1202.

注意,通常时间或关注时间的确定可基于任意标准,并且该确定所基于的图像可具有任何内容。当然,除图像的内容之外的条件可被用作确定标准。状态可根据例如记录的音频的大小、波形等而改变,或者可按照预定时间段的间隔改变。替代地,状态可根据外部指令(诸如,用户指令)改变。Note that the determination of the usual time or the attention time can be based on any criteria, and the image on which this determination is based can have any content. Of course, conditions other than the content of the image can be used as the determination criteria. The state can change based on, for example, the volume or waveform of the recorded audio, or can change at intervals of a predetermined time period. Alternatively, the state can change based on external instructions (such as user instructions).

另外,尽管已给出在两个状态(即,通常时间和关注时间)之间改变的例子的描述,但状态的数量是任意的,并且可在超过两个状态(诸如,通常时间、关注时间、更加关注时间和严重关注时间)之间执行状态改变。注意,将要改变的状态的上限数量取决于可缩放编码数据的层的数量。In addition, although the description has been given of an example of changing between two states (i.e., normal time and attention time), the number of states is arbitrary, and state changes may be performed between more than two states (such as normal time, attention time, more attention time, and serious attention time). Note that the upper limit number of states to be changed depends on the number of layers of scalable coded data.

此外,成像设备1201可被配置为根据状态确定可缩放编码的层的数量。例如,在通常时间中,成像设备1201可产生具有低质量和少量数据的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL)1222,并且将产生的可缩放编码数据(BL)1222提供给可缩放编码数据存储装置1202。另外,例如,在关注时间中,成像设备1201可产生具有高质量和大量数据的基本层的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221,并且将产生的可缩放编码数据(BL+EL)1221提供给可缩放编码数据存储装置1202。Furthermore, the imaging device 1201 may be configured to determine the number of scalable coded layers according to the state. For example, during normal time, the imaging device 1201 may generate scalable coded data (BL) 1222 of a base layer having low quality and a small amount of data, and provide the generated scalable coded data (BL) 1222 to the scalable coded data storage device 1202. Furthermore, for example, during the time of interest, the imaging device 1201 may generate scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221 of a base layer having high quality and a large amount of data, and provide the generated scalable coded data (BL+EL) 1221 to the scalable coded data storage device 1202.

尽管安全相机已被描述为例子,但成像系统1200可被用在任何应用中,并且可被用在除安全相机之外的应用中。Although a security camera has been described as an example, the imaging system 1200 may be used in any application and may be used in applications other than security cameras.

另外,以类似于以上参照图49至51描述的针对分级编码和分级解码的应用的方式,本技术还可以被应用于上述图59中示出的成像系统1200,由此实现与以上参照图49至51描述的优点类似的优点。In addition, in a manner similar to the application to hierarchical encoding and hierarchical decoding described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51, the present technology can also be applied to the imaging system 1200 shown in the above-mentioned Figure 59, thereby achieving advantages similar to those described above with reference to Figures 49 to 51.

注意,本技术还可以被应用于HTTP流传输,诸如MPEG DASH,其中从预先准备并且具有不同分辨率的多条编码数据之中选择合适的编码数据并且以段为单位使用选择的合适的编码数据。换句话说,也可以在多条编码数据之间共享关于编码和解码的信息。Note that this technology can also be applied to HTTP streaming, such as MPEG DASH, where appropriate encoded data is selected from multiple pieces of encoded data prepared in advance and having different resolutions, and the selected appropriate encoded data is used in units of segments. In other words, information about encoding and decoding can also be shared between multiple pieces of encoded data.

理所当然地,应用本技术的图像编码装置和图像解码装置还可以被应用于除上述设备之外的设备或系统。It goes without saying that the image encoding device and the image decoding device to which the present technology is applied can also be applied to devices or systems other than the above-mentioned devices.

注意,这里已描述这样的例子:量化矩阵(或用于形成量化矩阵的系数)被从编码侧发送到解码侧。用于发送量化矩阵的技术可以是:发送或记录量化矩阵作为与编码比特流关联的分开的数据,而不将量化参数多路复用到编码比特流中。如这里所使用,术语“关联”表示:当比特流中所包括的图像(该图像可以是图像的一部分,诸如片或块)被解码时,允许该图像链接到与该图像对应的信息。也就是说,可在与图像(或比特流)的传输路径不同的传输路径上传输该信息。另外,该信息可被记录在与图像(或比特流)的记录介质不同的记录介质上(或记录在同一记录介质的不同记录区域中)。此外,信息和图像(或比特流)可按照任意单位彼此关联,诸如多个帧、一个帧或帧的一部分。Note that an example has been described here in which the quantization matrix (or the coefficients used to form the quantization matrix) is transmitted from the encoding side to the decoding side. A technique for transmitting the quantization matrix can be to transmit or record the quantization matrix as separate data associated with the encoded bitstream, rather than multiplexing the quantization parameters into the encoded bitstream. As used herein, the term "associated" means that when an image (which may be a portion of an image, such as a slice or block) included in the bitstream is decoded, the image can be linked to information corresponding to the image. In other words, the information can be transmitted over a transmission path different from that used to transmit the image (or bitstream). Alternatively, the information can be recorded on a recording medium different from that used to record the image (or bitstream) (or in a different recording area on the same recording medium). Furthermore, the information and the image (or bitstream) can be associated with each other in arbitrary units, such as multiple frames, a single frame, or a portion of a frame.

标号列表Label list

10图像编码装置,14正交变换/量化单元,16无损编码单元,150矩阵处理单元,192DPCM单元,211DC系数编码单元,212AC系数DPCM单元,300图像解码装置,312无损解码单元,313去量化/逆正交变换单元,410矩阵产生单元,552逆DPCM单元,571初始设置单元,572DPCM解码单元,573DC系数提取单元,611AC系数缓冲器,612AC系数编码单元,613AC系数DPCM单元,614DC系数DPCM单元,621初始设置单元,622AC系数DPCM解码单元,623AC系数缓冲器,624DC系数DPCM解码单元,631AC系数DPCM单元,632DC系数缓冲器,633DC系数DPCM单元,641初始设置单元,642AC系数DPCM解码单元,643DC系数DPCM解码单元。10 image encoding device, 14 orthogonal transform/quantization unit, 16 lossless encoding unit, 150 matrix processing unit, 192 DPCM unit, 211 DC coefficient encoding unit, 212 AC coefficient DPCM unit, 300 image decoding device, 312 lossless decoding unit, 313 dequantization/inverse orthogonal transform unit, 410 matrix generating unit, 552 inverse DPCM unit, 571 initial setting unit, 572 DPCM decoding unit, 573 DC coefficient extraction unit, 611 AC coefficient buffer, 612 AC coefficient encoding unit, 613 AC coefficient DPCM unit, 614 DC coefficient DPCM unit, 621 initial setting unit, 622 AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit, 623 AC coefficient buffer, 624 DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit, 631 AC coefficient DPCM unit, 632 DC coefficient buffer, 633 DC coefficient DPCM unit, 641 initial setting unit, 642 AC coefficient DPCM decoding unit, 643 DC coefficient DPCM decoding unit.

Claims (19)

1.一种图像处理装置,包括:1. An image processing apparatus, comprising: 设置单元,设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,所述替换系数在替换位于对所述第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵进行上转换得到的第二尺寸的第二量化矩阵的开始的系数时被使用;The setting unit sets a replacement difference coefficient, which is the difference between the replacement coefficient and the coefficient at the beginning of the first quantization matrix of the first size. The replacement coefficient is used when replacing the coefficient at the beginning of the second quantization matrix of the second size obtained by upconverting the first quantization matrix of the first size. 量化单元,对变换系数数据进行量化以生成量化数据,所述变换系数数据通过对图像进行正交变换而获得;和A quantization unit quantizes transform coefficient data to generate quantized data, the transform coefficient data being obtained by performing an orthogonal transform on the image; and 编码单元,通过对由所述量化单元生成的量化数据进行编码来生成编码数据,所述编码数据包括由所述设置单元设置的所述替换差系数。The encoding unit generates encoded data by encoding the quantized data generated by the quantization unit, the encoded data including the substitution difference coefficients set by the setting unit. 2.如权利要求1所述的图像处理装置,其中2. The image processing apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein 所述设置单元设置作为所述第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵的系数彼此之差的差系数,The setting unit sets the difference coefficients, which are the differences between the coefficients of the first quantization matrix of the first size, respectively. 所述编码单元生成包括由所述设置单元设置的差系数的所述编码数据。The encoding unit generates the encoded data, which includes the difference coefficients set by the setting unit. 3.如权利要求2所述的图像处理装置,其中3. The image processing apparatus as claimed in claim 2, wherein 所述编码单元生成以将所述替换差系数和所述差系数汇集起来的差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。The encoding unit generates the encoded data of the syntax, which is a group of difference coefficients that combines the substitution difference coefficients and the difference coefficients. 4.如权利要求3所述的图像处理装置,其中4. The image processing apparatus as claimed in claim 3, wherein 所述编码单元按照所述替换差系数、所述差系数的顺序进行编码,生成以所述差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。The encoding unit encodes the data according to the order of the substitution difference coefficients and the difference coefficients, generating the encoded data with the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 5.如权利要求4所述的图像处理装置,其中5. The image processing apparatus as claimed in claim 4, wherein 所述设置单元设置作为所述替换系数与对量化矩阵设置的系数的初始值之差的初始差系数,The setting unit sets an initial difference coefficient as the difference between the replacement coefficient and the initial value of the coefficient set for the quantization matrix. 所述编码单元生成包括由所述设置单元设置的初始差系数的所述编码数据。The encoding unit generates the encoded data including the initial difference coefficients set by the setting unit. 6.如权利要求5所述的图像处理装置,其中6. The image processing apparatus of claim 5, wherein 所述编码单元按照所述初始差系数、所述差系数组的顺序进行编码,生成以所述初始差系数和所述差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。The encoding unit encodes the data in the order of the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group to generate the encoded data with the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 7.如权利要求6所述的图像处理装置,其中7. The image processing apparatus of claim 6, wherein 所述编码单元按照所述初始差系数、所述差系数组的顺序进行指数Golomb编码,生成以所述初始差系数的指数Golomb编码和所述差系数组的指数Golomb编码作为语法的所述编码数据。The encoding unit performs exponential Golomb encoding according to the order of the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group, generating the encoded data with the exponential Golomb encoding of the initial difference coefficients and the exponential Golomb encoding of the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 8.如权利要求7所述的图像处理装置,其中8. The image processing apparatus of claim 7, wherein 所述图像处理装置还包括正交变换单元,所述正交变换单元对所述图像进行正交变换来生成所述变换系数数据,The image processing device further includes an orthogonal transformation unit, which performs an orthogonal transformation on the image to generate the transformation coefficient data. 所述量化单元对由所述正交变换单元生成的所述变换系数数据进行量化。The quantization unit quantizes the transformation coefficient data generated by the orthogonal transformation unit. 9.如权利要求8所述的图像处理装置,其中9. The image processing apparatus of claim 8, wherein 所述正交变换单元以第二尺寸的变换单位进行正交变换来生成所述变换系数数据,The orthogonal transformation unit generates the transformation coefficient data by performing orthogonal transformations using a transformation unit of the second size. 所述量化单元使用所述第二尺寸的第二量化矩阵对由所述正交变换单元生成的所述变换系数数据进行量化。The quantization unit uses a second quantization matrix of the second size to quantize the transformation coefficient data generated by the orthogonal transformation unit. 10.一种图像处理方法,其中,10. An image processing method, wherein, 设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,所述替换系数在替换位于对所述第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵进行上转换得到的第二尺寸的第二量化矩阵的开始的系数时被使用;A substitution difference coefficient is set, which is the difference between the substitution coefficient and the coefficient at the beginning of the first quantization matrix of the first size. The substitution coefficient is used when replacing the coefficient at the beginning of the second quantization matrix of the second size obtained by up-converting the first quantization matrix of the first size. 对变换系数数据进行量化以生成量化数据,所述变换系数数据通过对图像进行正交变换而获得;The transform coefficient data is quantized to generate quantized data, which is obtained by performing an orthogonal transform on the image; 通过对所生成的量化数据进行编码来生成编码数据,所述编码数据包括所设置的所述替换差系数。Encoded data is generated by encoding the generated quantized data, and the encoded data includes the set substitution difference coefficient. 11.如权利要求10所述的图像处理方法,其中11. The image processing method as described in claim 10, wherein... 设置作为所述第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵的系数彼此之差的差系数,Set the difference coefficients, which are the differences between the coefficients of the first quantization matrix of the first size, to represent the differences between each other. 生成包括由所设置的差系数的所述编码数据。Generate the encoded data, which includes the difference coefficients set. 12.如权利要求11所述的图像处理方法,其中12. The image processing method as described in claim 11, wherein... 生成以将所述替换差系数和所述差系数汇集起来的差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。Generate the coded data of the syntax by combining the substitution difference coefficients and the difference coefficients into a group of difference coefficients. 13.如权利要求12所述的图像处理方法,其中13. The image processing method as described in claim 12, wherein... 按照所述替换差系数、所述差系数的顺序进行编码,生成以所述差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。The encoding is performed according to the order of the replacement difference coefficients and the difference coefficients to generate the encoded data with the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 14.如权利要求13所述的图像处理方法,其中14. The image processing method as described in claim 13, wherein... 设置作为所述替换系数与对量化矩阵设置的系数的初始值之差的初始差系数,Set an initial difference coefficient as the difference between the replacement coefficient and the initial values of the coefficients set for the quantization matrix. 生成包括所设置的初始差系数的所述编码数据。Generate the encoded data, including the initial difference coefficients set. 15.如权利要求14所述的图像处理方法,其中15. The image processing method as described in claim 14, wherein... 按照所述初始差系数、所述差系数组的顺序进行编码,生成以所述初始差系数和所述差系数组作为语法的所述编码数据。Encode the data in the order of the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group to generate the encoded data with the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 16.如权利要求15所述的图像处理方法,其中16. The image processing method as described in claim 15, wherein... 按照所述初始差系数、所述差系数组的顺序进行指数Golomb编码,生成以所述初始差系数的指数Golomb编码和所述差系数组的指数Golomb编码作为语法的所述编码数据。Perform exponential Golomb encoding according to the order of the initial difference coefficients and the difference coefficient group to generate the encoded data with the exponential Golomb encoding of the initial difference coefficients and the exponential Golomb encoding of the difference coefficient group as the syntax. 17.如权利要求16所述的图像处理方法,其中17. The image processing method as described in claim 16, wherein... 对所述图像进行正交变换来生成所述变换系数数据,The image is subjected to an orthogonal transformation to generate the transformation coefficient data. 对所生成的所述变换系数数据进行量化。The generated transformation coefficient data is then quantized. 18.如权利要求17所述的图像处理方法,其中18. The image processing method as described in claim 17, wherein... 以第二尺寸的变换单位进行正交变换来生成所述变换系数数据,The transformation coefficient data is generated by performing an orthogonal transformation using a second-sized transformation unit. 使用所述第二尺寸的第二量化矩阵对所生成的所述变换系数数据进行量化。The generated transform coefficient data is quantized using a second quantization matrix of the second size. 19.一种计算机能够读取的记录介质,所述记录介质记录有程序,所述程序使计算机作为如下单元发挥功能:19. A computer-readable recording medium having a program recorded thereon that enables a computer to function as a unit: 设置单元,设置替换差系数,该替换差系数是替换系数与位于第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵的开始的系数之差,所述替换系数在替换位于对所述第一尺寸的第一量化矩阵进行上转换得到的第二尺寸的第二量化矩阵的开始的系数时被使用;The setting unit sets a replacement difference coefficient, which is the difference between the replacement coefficient and the coefficient at the beginning of the first quantization matrix of the first size. The replacement coefficient is used when replacing the coefficient at the beginning of the second quantization matrix of the second size obtained by upconverting the first quantization matrix of the first size. 量化单元,对变换系数数据进行量化以生成量化数据,所述变换系数数据通过对图像进行正交变换而获得;和A quantization unit quantizes transform coefficient data to generate quantized data, the transform coefficient data being obtained by performing an orthogonal transform on the image; and 编码单元,通过对由所述量化单元生成的量化数据进行编码来生成编码数据,所述编码数据包括由所述设置单元设置的所述替换差系数。The encoding unit generates encoded data by encoding the quantized data generated by the quantization unit, the encoded data including the substitution difference coefficients set by the setting unit.
HK18102904.1A 2012-02-29 2018-02-28 Image processing device and method HK1243572B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012044009 2012-02-29
JP2012-044009 2012-02-29

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
HK1243572A1 HK1243572A1 (en) 2018-07-13
HK1243572B true HK1243572B (en) 2020-12-11

Family

ID=

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6635184B2 (en) Image processing apparatus and method
AU2020205233B2 (en) Image processing device and method
HK40001979B (en) Image processing device and method
HK1243572B (en) Image processing device and method
HK1244383B (en) Image processing device and method
HK40001979A (en) Image processing device and method
HK1244383A1 (en) Image processing device and method
HK1238048B (en) Image processing device and method
HK1238050B (en) Image processing device and method
HK1238050A1 (en) Image processing device and method
HK1238048A1 (en) Image processing device and method